1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures false
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 1
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 1
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 1
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation skip
137 \math_numbering_side default
138 \quotes_style english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
158 by the \SpecialChar LyX
163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
165 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
166 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
167 Documentation mailing list:
168 \begin_inset CommandInset href
170 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Newline newline
190 \begin_inset Note Note
193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
194 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
195 \begin_inset Newline newline
200 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
201 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
209 \begin_layout Standard
210 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
211 LatexCommand tableofcontents
218 \begin_layout Chapter
222 \begin_layout Section
223 What is \SpecialChar LyX
227 \begin_layout Standard
229 is a document preparation system.
230 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
231 scripts, publishable books, business
232 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
233 It is unlike most other
234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
241 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
243 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
259 pt type, left justified, 5
260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
269 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
273 \begin_layout Standard
274 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
279 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
283 \begin_layout Standard
288 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
289 's philosophy: most importantly,
290 the format of all of the manuals.
291 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
292 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
298 manual describes that, too.
301 \begin_layout Section
306 \begin_layout Standard
307 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
308 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
310 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
311 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
315 \begin_layout Standard
316 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
317 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
318 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
320 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
321 only a vertical scrollbar.
322 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
323 The first case is large images.
324 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
325 image and use the option
336 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
339 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
340 this doesn't work for equations yet.
343 \begin_layout Standard
344 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
345 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
353 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
360 \begin_layout Section
364 \begin_layout Standard
365 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
367 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
369 Just select the manual you want to read from the
376 \begin_layout Section
377 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
381 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
388 \begin_layout Standard
389 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
390 can be configured via the menu
392 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
396 \begin_inset Index idx
399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
406 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
408 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 packages are available.
410 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
412 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
414 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
419 \begin_inset space \space{}
422 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
423 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
425 To force \SpecialChar LyX
426 to re-inspect your system, you should use
428 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
432 \begin_inset Index idx
435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
436 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
442 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
443 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
446 \begin_layout Section
449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
451 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
458 \begin_layout Standard
459 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
460 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
461 installed, but you will not be
462 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
463 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
464 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
465 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
466 document can always be output as plain text
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 or DocBook classes or packages.
473 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
474 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
477 \begin_layout Standard
478 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
479 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
480 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
483 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
491 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
492 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
495 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
499 \begin_inset Index idx
502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
503 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
511 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
518 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
522 \begin_layout Chapter
523 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
527 \begin_layout Section
528 Basic File Operations
529 \begin_inset Index idx
532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
541 \begin_layout Standard
546 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
547 in addition to some more advanced operations:
550 \begin_layout Itemize
572 \begin_layout Itemize
588 arg "buffer-new-template"
594 \begin_layout Itemize
616 \begin_layout Itemize
626 \begin_layout Itemize
640 \begin_layout Itemize
662 \begin_layout Itemize
674 arg "buffer-write-as"
680 \begin_layout Itemize
694 \begin_layout Itemize
708 \begin_layout Standard
709 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
710 a few minor differences.
713 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
724 command lists the available templates.
725 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
726 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
727 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
735 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
742 \begin_layout Standard
743 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
775 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
776 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
777 is just that — a big, blank space.
785 \begin_layout Standard
806 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
811 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
814 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
832 will reload the document from disk.
833 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
834 and want to restore it to the last save.
843 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
844 them as your changes.
847 \begin_layout Section
848 Basic Editing Features
849 \begin_inset Index idx
852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
861 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
868 \begin_layout Standard
869 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
870 can perform cut and paste operations
871 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
872 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
873 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
874 editing features and how to access
876 We will start with cut and paste.
879 \begin_layout Standard
880 As you might expect, the
884 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
885 various other editing features.
886 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
890 \begin_layout Itemize
896 \begin_inset Index idx
899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
928 \begin_layout Itemize
934 \begin_inset Index idx
937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
966 \begin_layout Itemize
972 \begin_inset Index idx
975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1000 \begin_layout Itemize
1004 \begin_inset space ~
1010 \begin_layout Itemize
1014 \begin_inset space ~
1020 \begin_layout Itemize
1024 \begin_inset space ~
1028 \begin_inset space ~
1034 \begin_inset Index idx
1037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1046 \begin_inset Index idx
1049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1064 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1074 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1080 \begin_layout Standard
1081 The first three are self-explanatory.
1082 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1083 and other programs by
1104 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1105 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1110 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1111 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1112 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1113 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1114 into individual cells.
1118 \begin_inset space ~
1123 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1124 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1128 \begin_layout Standard
1132 \begin_inset space ~
1137 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1139 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1141 \begin_inset space ~
1148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1154 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1155 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1156 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1162 \begin_inset space \space{}
1165 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1166 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1169 \begin_inset space ~
1172 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1174 \begin_inset space ~
1178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1182 \begin_inset space ~
1191 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1192 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1194 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1198 \begin_inset space ~
1203 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1204 start a new paragraph.
1205 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1206 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1211 \begin_inset space ~
1214 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1220 \begin_inset space ~
1228 \begin_inset space ~
1231 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1234 paste from the primary selection.
1235 This is normally the currently selected text.
1238 \begin_layout Standard
1241 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1243 \begin_inset space ~
1247 \begin_inset space ~
1255 \begin_inset space ~
1259 \begin_inset space ~
1265 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1271 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1274 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1288 button to skip the current word.
1292 \begin_inset space ~
1297 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1301 \begin_inset space ~
1306 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1308 If the toggle is set, searching for
1309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1320 will not match the word
1321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1335 Match whole words only
1337 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1338 to only find complete words, e.
1339 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1368 offers also an advanced
1371 \begin_inset space ~
1375 \begin_inset space ~
1380 feature that is described in section
1381 \begin_inset space ~
1385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1387 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1394 \begin_layout Standard
1395 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1396 \begin_inset space \space{}
1400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1408 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1410 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1415 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1422 \begin_layout Standard
1426 arg "inset-select-all"
1429 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1430 When the cursor is inside an inset
1433 arg "inset-select-all"
1436 selects the content of the inset.
1440 arg "inset-select-all"
1443 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1448 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1451 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1455 \begin_layout Section
1457 \begin_inset Index idx
1460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1467 \begin_inset Index idx
1470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1479 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1486 \begin_layout Standard
1487 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1489 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1495 or the toolbar button
1501 to undo some mistake.
1502 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1504 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1507 or the toolbar button
1514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1521 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1525 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1528 \begin_layout Standard
1529 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1538 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1539 This is a consequence of the 100
1540 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1543 step undo limit mentioned above.
1546 \begin_layout Standard
1555 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1557 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1561 \begin_layout Section
1563 \begin_inset Index idx
1566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1575 \begin_layout Standard
1576 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1579 \begin_layout Enumerate
1584 \begin_layout Itemize
1589 once anywhere in the edit window.
1590 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1594 \begin_layout Enumerate
1599 \begin_layout Itemize
1606 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1609 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1612 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1613 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1617 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1620 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1627 \begin_layout Enumerate
1628 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1632 \begin_layout Standard
1633 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1634 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1638 \begin_layout Section
1640 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1642 name "sec:Navigating"
1647 \begin_inset Index idx
1650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1659 \begin_layout Standard
1661 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1664 \begin_layout Itemize
1669 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1670 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1673 \begin_layout Itemize
1674 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1676 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1678 \begin_inset space ~
1683 or by the toolbar button
1686 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1692 \begin_layout Itemize
1693 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1695 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1698 and use the same menu to return to them.
1699 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1702 \begin_layout Standard
1706 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1711 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1712 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1714 \begin_inset space ~
1719 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1720 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1721 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1722 your last editing position.
1725 \begin_layout Standard
1730 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1734 \begin_layout Subsection
1736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1738 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1743 \begin_inset Index idx
1746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1747 Navigating ! Outline
1753 \begin_inset Index idx
1756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1765 \begin_layout Standard
1766 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1767 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1768 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1770 \begin_inset space ~
1774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1776 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1780 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1781 \begin_inset space ~
1785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1787 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1792 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1796 \begin_layout Standard
1797 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1798 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1799 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1800 dialog and to modify the citation.
1803 \begin_layout Standard
1808 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1809 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1811 Labels and References
1813 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1822 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1825 \begin_layout Standard
1826 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1827 you further to control the display.
1832 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1833 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1839 option keeps it in the current view state.
1840 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1841 \begin_inset space ~
1844 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1845 \begin_inset space ~
1848 3, the subsections of sections
1849 \begin_inset space ~
1852 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1857 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1858 \begin_inset space ~
1862 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1872 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1875 \begin_layout Standard
1882 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1883 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1897 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1898 So, for example, you can move section
1899 \begin_inset space ~
1903 \begin_inset space ~
1906 2.4 or after section
1907 \begin_inset space ~
1912 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1925 (or the corresponding key bindings
1933 ) you can change the level of sections.
1934 So you can for example make section
1935 \begin_inset space ~
1939 \begin_inset space ~
1943 \begin_inset space ~
1949 \begin_layout Standard
1950 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1951 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1954 \begin_layout Subsection
1955 Horizontal Scrolling
1956 \begin_inset Index idx
1959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1960 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1968 \begin_layout Standard
1970 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1976 \begin_inset space \space{}
1980 \begin_inset space ~
1983 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1984 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1985 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1989 \begin_layout Standard
1990 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1994 \begin_layout Itemize
1996 is used on a small tablet computer
1999 \begin_layout Itemize
2000 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2012 \begin_inset space ~
2025 \begin_layout Itemize
2026 Math constructs with long command names
2029 \begin_layout Standard
2030 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2031 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2033 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2034 windows so that table
2035 \begin_inset space ~
2039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2041 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2046 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2048 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2049 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2052 \begin_layout Standard
2053 \begin_inset Float table
2059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2060 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2065 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2069 Horizontal scrolling test.
2077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2079 \begin_inset Tabular
2080 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2081 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2082 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2126 \begin_layout Section
2127 Input/Word Completion
2128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2130 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2135 \begin_inset Index idx
2138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2145 \begin_inset Index idx
2148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Standard
2181 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2183 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2184 is used to propose completions.
2187 \begin_layout Standard
2188 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2191 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2196 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2203 \begin_inset space ~
2207 \begin_inset space ~
2212 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2216 \begin_inset space ~
2221 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2222 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2226 \begin_inset space ~
2232 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2233 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2234 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2235 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2238 \begin_layout Standard
2240 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2241 completions available.
2246 key to accept a proposed completion.
2247 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2248 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2249 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2256 \begin_layout Standard
2257 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2258 ing options for text.
2259 The special math option
2263 enables characters to be composed.
2264 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2265 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2268 , you can then input the characters
2269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2280 to a formula to get it.
2281 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2282 of the math toolbar.
2283 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2287 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2288 's installation folder.
2289 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2298 \begin_layout Section
2300 \begin_inset Index idx
2303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2310 \begin_inset Index idx
2313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2342 \begin_inset Index idx
2345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2376 \begin_layout Standard
2377 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2391 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2394 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2398 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2399 \begin_inset space ~
2403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2405 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2412 \begin_layout Standard
2416 \begin_inset space ~
2424 \begin_inset space ~
2445 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2449 \begin_layout Labeling
2450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2454 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2455 LatexCommand nomenclature
2457 description "Tabulator key"
2464 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2466 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2467 \begin_inset space ~
2471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2473 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2480 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2484 , especially section
2485 \begin_inset space ~
2489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2491 reference "subsec:Lists"
2497 If you are still confused, look in the
2502 \begin_inset Newline newline
2510 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2511 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2515 \begin_layout Labeling
2516 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2520 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2521 LatexCommand nomenclature
2523 description "Escape key"
2531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2538 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2539 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2542 \begin_layout Labeling
2543 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2549 \begin_inset space ~
2553 \begin_inset space ~
2560 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2561 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2565 \begin_layout Standard
2566 There are three modifier keys:
2569 \begin_layout Labeling
2570 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2588 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2589 LatexCommand nomenclature
2591 description "Control key"
2596 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2597 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2601 \begin_layout Itemize
2610 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2613 \begin_layout Itemize
2622 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2625 \begin_layout Itemize
2634 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2638 \begin_layout Labeling
2639 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2657 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2658 LatexCommand nomenclature
2660 description "Shift key"
2665 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2666 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2669 \begin_layout Labeling
2670 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2688 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2689 LatexCommand nomenclature
2691 description "Alt or Meta key"
2696 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2697 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2698 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2704 \begin_inset Newline newline
2707 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2709 menu accelerator keys
2712 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2713 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2717 \begin_layout Standard
2718 For example, the sequence
2719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2725 \begin_inset space ~
2729 \begin_inset space ~
2735 \begin_inset space ~
2743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2762 \begin_inset space ~
2768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2778 \begin_layout Standard
2783 manual lists all other things bound to the
2791 \begin_layout Standard
2792 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2794 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2795 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2796 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2797 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2798 The \SpecialChar LyX
2799 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2800 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2801 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2803 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2819 followed by a capital
2826 \begin_layout Chapter
2829 \begin_inset Index idx
2832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2842 \begin_layout Section
2844 \begin_inset Index idx
2847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2856 \begin_layout Subsection
2860 \begin_layout Standard
2861 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2862 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2863 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2864 numbering schemes, and so on.
2865 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2866 and format the title of your document differently.
2869 \begin_layout Standard
2874 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2875 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2876 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2877 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2878 picks one for you by default.
2879 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2882 \begin_layout Subsection
2884 \begin_inset Index idx
2887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2896 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2903 \begin_layout Standard
2904 You can select a class using the
2906 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2907 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2911 \begin_inset Index idx
2914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2921 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2925 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2929 \begin_layout Standard
2930 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2935 \begin_layout Description
2936 Article for basic articles
2939 \begin_layout Description
2940 Report for basic reports
2943 \begin_layout Description
2944 Book for writing a book
2947 \begin_layout Description
2948 Letter for US-style letters
2951 \begin_layout Standard
2952 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2953 only uses if you have installed
2954 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2955 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2956 distributions will include
2958 Here are some of the classes.
2959 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2961 Special Document Classes
2970 \begin_layout Description
2971 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2974 \begin_layout Description
2975 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2979 \begin_layout Description
2980 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2984 \begin_layout Description
2985 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2986 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2987 There are three article layouts available.
2988 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2989 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2990 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2991 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2996 sequential numbering
2997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3000 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3001 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3002 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3003 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3006 \begin_layout Description
3007 Beamer Layout for presentations
3010 \begin_layout Description
3011 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3012 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3013 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3014 with \SpecialChar LyX
3018 \begin_layout Description
3019 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3022 \begin_layout Description
3024 \begin_inset space ~
3027 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3030 \begin_layout Description
3031 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3034 \begin_layout Description
3035 Foils Used to make transparencies
3038 \begin_layout Description
3039 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3040 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3041 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3042 with \SpecialChar LyX
3046 \begin_layout Description
3047 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3048 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3051 \begin_layout Description
3052 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3055 \begin_layout Description
3056 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3059 \begin_layout Description
3060 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3061 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3062 (Is used by this document.)
3065 \begin_layout Description
3066 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3069 \begin_layout Description
3070 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3073 \begin_layout Description
3078 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3079 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3081 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3085 \begin_layout Description
3086 Slides Used to make transparencies
3089 \begin_layout Description
3091 \begin_inset space ~
3094 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3095 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3098 \begin_layout Description
3099 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3102 \begin_layout Standard
3103 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3105 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3107 Special Document Classes
3114 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3115 of the document classes.
3118 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3122 \begin_layout Standard
3123 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3126 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3128 \begin_inset Index idx
3131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3148 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3149 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3151 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3154 \begin_layout Standard
3157 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3162 , are highly specialized.
3164 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3165 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3166 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3167 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3168 by some document class.
3169 There are just too many of them.
3170 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3173 \begin_layout Standard
3174 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3182 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3183 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3184 document class for a new file.
3186 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3189 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3196 manual for information on how to install them.
3197 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3203 \begin_layout Standard
3204 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3205 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3206 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3207 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3208 class files to be used for dissertation
3209 s submitted to those universities.
3210 The \SpecialChar LyX
3211 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3213 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3217 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3223 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3226 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3230 name "subsec:Modules"
3235 \begin_inset Index idx
3238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3247 \begin_layout Standard
3248 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3249 chosen document class.
3250 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3251 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3258 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3262 \begin_inset Index idx
3265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3272 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3276 \begin_layout Standard
3277 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3278 packages or file format converters that are not always
3279 installed by default.
3281 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3282 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3283 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3284 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3286 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3287 file without the missing prerequisites.
3288 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3289 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3292 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3296 \begin_inset Index idx
3299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3300 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3306 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3311 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3314 \begin_layout Standard
3315 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3323 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3325 will advise you about these things.
3333 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3337 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3342 \begin_inset Index idx
3345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3346 Document ! Local Layout
3354 \begin_layout Standard
3355 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3356 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3357 : They are intended to be used in
3358 a variety of different documents.
3359 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3360 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3361 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3362 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3363 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3365 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3383 manual for information on how to use it.
3386 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3390 \begin_layout Standard
3391 Each class has a default set of options.
3392 Here's a quick table describing them:
3395 \begin_layout Standard
3396 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3402 \begin_layout Standard
3404 \begin_inset Tabular
3405 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3406 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3407 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3865 \begin_layout Standard
3866 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3872 \begin_layout Standard
3873 You're probably also wondering what
3874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3878 \begin_inset space ~
3882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3886 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3887 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3892 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3897 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3907 headings, there are also
3915 headings, and so on.
3916 We will describe these headings fully in section
3917 \begin_inset space ~
3921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3923 reference "subsec:Headings"
3930 \begin_layout Subsection
3932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3934 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3939 \begin_inset Index idx
3942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3949 \begin_inset Index idx
3952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3961 \begin_layout Standard
3962 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3964 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3971 \begin_inset space ~
3979 \begin_inset space ~
3984 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3986 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3987 doesn't support special options you want to
3988 use for your document.
3989 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3990 -class and its options, you have to read
3994 \begin_layout Standard
3998 \begin_inset space ~
4005 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4011 \begin_inset space ~
4016 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4017 You can choose between the following five options:
4020 \begin_layout Labeling
4021 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4026 Use default page style of current class.
4029 \begin_layout Labeling
4030 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4035 No page numbers or headings.
4038 \begin_layout Labeling
4039 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4047 \begin_layout Labeling
4048 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4053 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4054 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4055 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4056 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4059 \begin_layout Labeling
4060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4065 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4066 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4072 \begin_inset Index idx
4075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4083 How they are defined is explained in section
4084 \begin_inset space ~
4088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4090 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4097 \begin_layout Standard
4098 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4099 \begin_inset space ~
4103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4105 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4112 \begin_layout Subsection
4113 Paper Size and Orientation
4114 \begin_inset Index idx
4117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4118 Document ! Paper size
4124 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4126 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4133 \begin_layout Standard
4134 You can find the following options in the menu
4137 \begin_inset space ~
4144 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4148 \begin_inset Index idx
4151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4160 \begin_layout Labeling
4161 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4165 \begin_inset space ~
4170 What size paper to print on.
4175 \begin_layout Itemize
4181 \begin_layout Itemize
4187 \begin_layout Itemize
4193 \begin_layout Itemize
4199 \begin_layout Itemize
4202 US letter, US legal, US executive
4205 \begin_layout Itemize
4211 \begin_layout Itemize
4218 \begin_layout Labeling
4219 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4224 To choose whether to output as
4235 \begin_layout Labeling
4236 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4240 \begin_inset space ~
4245 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4246 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4249 \begin_layout Subsection
4251 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4253 name "subsec:Margins"
4258 \begin_inset Index idx
4261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4268 \begin_inset Index idx
4271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4280 \begin_layout Standard
4281 Paper margins are set in the menu
4283 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4287 \begin_inset Index idx
4290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4299 \begin_layout Standard
4300 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4301 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4302 the paper format and the font size into account.
4305 \begin_layout Subsection
4309 \begin_layout Standard
4310 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4316 That includes the paragraph environments.
4317 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4318 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4319 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4321 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4330 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4332 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4333 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4334 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4337 \begin_layout Section
4338 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4339 \begin_inset Index idx
4342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4343 Paragraph ! Indentation
4351 \begin_layout Subsection
4353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4355 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4362 \begin_layout Standard
4363 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4364 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4367 \begin_layout Standard
4368 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4369 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4370 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4371 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4375 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4381 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4382 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4383 language than English.
4385 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4388 \begin_layout Standard
4389 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4390 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4391 into \SpecialChar LyX
4393 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4396 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4398 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4399 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4400 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4407 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4408 goes to produce a printable file.
4413 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4415 gives you the ability globally to change
4419 these pre-coded spacings.
4420 We will explain more later.
4423 \begin_layout Subsection
4424 Paragraph Separation
4425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4427 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4432 \begin_inset Index idx
4435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4436 Paragraph ! Separation
4444 \begin_layout Standard
4452 \begin_inset space ~
4460 \begin_inset space ~
4467 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4471 \begin_inset Index idx
4474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4480 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4483 \begin_layout Subsection
4487 \begin_layout Standard
4488 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4491 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4493 \begin_inset space ~
4498 dialog and toggle the
4501 \begin_inset space ~
4506 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4509 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4513 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4514 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4518 \begin_layout Standard
4519 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4520 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4523 \begin_layout Subsection
4525 \begin_inset Index idx
4528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4529 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4537 \begin_layout Standard
4540 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4544 \begin_inset Index idx
4547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4556 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4560 \begin_inset space ~
4569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4570 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4576 \begin_inset Index idx
4579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4586 installed to use this feature.
4591 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4593 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4595 \begin_inset space ~
4600 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4601 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4604 \begin_layout Section
4605 Paragraph Environments
4606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4608 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4613 \begin_inset Index idx
4616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4617 Paragraph ! Environments
4623 \begin_inset Index idx
4626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4627 Paragraph environments|(
4635 \begin_layout Subsection
4639 \begin_layout Standard
4640 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4643 \begin_layout Standard
4652 } \SpecialChar ldots
4662 \begin_inset Newline newline
4665 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4667 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4668 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4669 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4678 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4681 \begin_layout Standard
4682 A paragraph environment is simply a
4683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4690 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4691 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4692 scheme, labels, and so on.
4693 Additionally, you can
4694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4701 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4702 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4703 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4704 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4706 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4708 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4711 \begin_layout Standard
4712 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4713 \begin_inset Graphics
4714 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4720 at the left end of the toolbar.
4722 will change the environment of the
4726 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4727 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4728 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4732 \begin_layout Standard
4741 create a new paragraph using the
4745 paragraph environment.
4747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4754 because if you are in one of these environments:
4757 \begin_layout Itemize
4763 \begin_layout Itemize
4769 \begin_layout Itemize
4775 \begin_layout Itemize
4781 \begin_layout Itemize
4787 \begin_layout Itemize
4793 \begin_layout Itemize
4799 \begin_layout Standard
4801 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4805 , rather than resetting it to
4810 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4811 \begin_inset space ~
4815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4817 reference "sec:Nesting"
4824 \begin_layout Subsection
4828 \begin_layout Standard
4829 The default paragraph environment is
4834 It creates a plain paragraph.
4836 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4837 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4838 this manual) are in the
4845 \begin_layout Standard
4846 You can nest a paragraph using the
4850 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4858 \begin_layout Subsection
4860 \begin_inset Index idx
4863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4872 \begin_layout Standard
4873 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4874 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4883 for thanks or contact information.
4884 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4885 places all of this on a separate page
4886 along with today's date.
4887 For other types of documents, the title
4888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4895 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4899 \begin_layout Standard
4901 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4915 Here's how you use them:
4918 \begin_layout Itemize
4919 Put the title of your document in the
4926 \begin_layout Itemize
4927 Put the author name in the
4934 \begin_layout Itemize
4935 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4936 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4942 Note that using this environment is optional.
4943 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4944 will automatically insert today's date.
4945 If you don't want a date, use the option
4947 Suppress default date on front page
4951 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4952 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4954 \begin_inset space ~
4962 \begin_layout Standard
4963 You can use footnotes to insert
4964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4971 or contact information.
4974 \begin_layout Subsection
4976 \begin_inset Index idx
4979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4988 name "subsec:Headings"
4995 \begin_layout Standard
4996 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4998 takes care of the numbering for you.
5001 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5003 \begin_inset Index idx
5006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5007 Section headings ! Numbered
5015 \begin_layout Standard
5016 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5020 \begin_layout Enumerate
5026 \begin_layout Enumerate
5032 \begin_layout Enumerate
5038 \begin_layout Enumerate
5044 \begin_layout Enumerate
5050 \begin_layout Enumerate
5056 \begin_layout Enumerate
5062 \begin_layout Standard
5064 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5065 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5066 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5069 \begin_layout Standard
5070 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5071 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5072 You group the book into chapters.
5074 does a similar grouping:
5077 \begin_layout Itemize
5082 is divided into either
5093 \begin_layout Itemize
5105 \begin_layout Itemize
5117 \begin_layout Itemize
5129 \begin_layout Itemize
5141 \begin_layout Itemize
5153 \begin_layout Standard
5154 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5162 Not all document types use the
5166 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5171 is the top-level heading.
5179 \begin_layout Standard
5184 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5185 labels it with its number,
5186 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5188 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5200 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5202 \begin_inset Index idx
5205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5206 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5214 \begin_layout Standard
5215 The unnumbered section headings have a
5216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5223 at the end of their name.
5224 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5225 the table of contents, see section
5226 \begin_inset space ~
5230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5239 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5240 Changing the Numbering
5241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5243 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5250 \begin_layout Standard
5251 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5252 in the Table of Contents.
5253 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5255 Just as certain classes start with
5269 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5279 This is something you can change.
5282 \begin_layout Standard
5285 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5289 \begin_inset Index idx
5292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5301 \begin_inset space ~
5305 \begin_inset space ~
5310 you will see two counters.
5315 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5316 numbers a section heading.
5317 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5321 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5322 Short Titles of Headings
5323 \begin_inset Index idx
5326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5327 Section headings ! Short titles
5333 \begin_inset Argument 1
5336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5345 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5352 \begin_layout Standard
5353 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5354 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5355 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5356 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5359 \begin_layout Standard
5361 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5362 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5363 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5364 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5367 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5369 \begin_inset space ~
5375 This will insert a box labeled
5376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5380 \begin_inset space ~
5384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5387 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5388 This also works for captions inside floats.
5389 There can only be one short title per title.
5392 \begin_layout Standard
5393 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5400 \begin_layout Standard
5401 The following information applies to all section headings:
5404 \begin_layout Itemize
5405 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5408 \begin_layout Itemize
5409 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5412 \begin_layout Itemize
5413 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5416 \begin_layout Itemize
5417 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5420 \begin_layout Subsection
5424 \begin_layout Standard
5426 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5440 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5441 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5442 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5443 the text they contain.
5444 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5452 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5455 \begin_layout Standard
5456 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5465 when you start a new paragraph.
5466 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5470 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5471 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5472 have to change back to the
5476 environment yourself.
5479 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5488 \begin_inset Index idx
5491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5500 \begin_layout Standard
5501 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5502 time for the differences.
5511 are identical except for one difference:
5515 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5524 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5527 \begin_layout Standard
5528 Here's an example of the
5541 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5543 See – no indentation!
5547 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5548 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5549 the other paragraph.
5552 \begin_layout Standard
5553 Here's another example, this time in the
5560 \begin_layout Quotation
5566 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5567 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5568 the first line, then
5572 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5576 you were quoting other text.
5579 \begin_layout Quotation
5580 Here's a new paragraph.
5581 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5582 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5585 \begin_layout Standard
5586 As the examples show,
5590 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5591 They should put quotes in the
5596 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5600 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5603 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5605 \begin_inset Index idx
5608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5615 \begin_inset Index idx
5618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5634 \begin_layout Standard
5639 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5645 \begin_inset Newline newline
5648 Which I did not rehearse!
5652 It could be much worse.
5653 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5655 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5656 indented a bit more than the first.
5657 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5663 \begin_inset Newline newline
5666 And make things look fine
5667 \begin_inset Newline newline
5673 arg "newline-insert newline"
5679 \begin_layout Standard
5684 does not indent both margins.
5685 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5686 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5689 arg "newline-insert newline"
5695 \begin_layout Subsection
5697 \begin_inset Index idx
5700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5716 \begin_layout Standard
5718 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5728 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5729 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5738 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5739 lets you provide your own label.
5740 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5741 describing some general features of all four of them.
5744 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5748 \begin_layout Standard
5749 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5751 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5752 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5761 reset the environment to
5765 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5766 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5767 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5771 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5775 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5782 \begin_layout Standard
5783 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5784 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5785 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5787 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5788 you read all of section
5789 \begin_inset space ~
5793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5795 reference "sec:Nesting"
5802 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5804 \begin_inset Index idx
5807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5823 \begin_layout Standard
5824 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5828 paragraph environment.
5829 It has the following properties:
5832 \begin_layout Itemize
5833 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5837 \begin_layout Itemize
5839 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5842 \begin_layout Itemize
5843 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5847 \begin_layout Itemize
5848 The items can have any length.
5850 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5851 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5858 \begin_layout Itemize
5863 environment inside another
5867 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5871 \begin_layout Itemize
5872 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5875 \begin_layout Itemize
5877 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5880 \begin_layout Itemize
5882 \begin_inset space ~
5886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5888 reference "sec:Nesting"
5892 for a full explanation of nesting.
5896 \begin_layout Standard
5897 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5906 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5909 \begin_layout Standard
5910 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5911 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5914 \begin_layout Itemize
5915 The label for the first level
5919 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5923 \begin_layout Itemize
5924 The label for the second level is a dash.
5928 \begin_layout Itemize
5929 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5933 \begin_layout Itemize
5934 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5938 \begin_layout Itemize
5939 Back out to the third level.
5943 \begin_layout Itemize
5944 Back to the second level.
5948 \begin_layout Itemize
5949 Back to the outermost level.
5952 \begin_layout Standard
5953 These are the default labels for an
5958 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5960 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5963 dialog in the submenu
5968 \begin_inset Index idx
5971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5977 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5981 \begin_layout Standard
5982 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5983 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5985 \begin_inset space ~
5989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5991 reference "sec:Nesting"
5998 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6000 \begin_inset Index idx
6003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6012 name "sec:Enumerate"
6019 \begin_layout Standard
6024 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6025 It has these properties:
6028 \begin_layout Enumerate
6029 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6033 \begin_layout Enumerate
6034 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6038 \begin_layout Enumerate
6040 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6043 \begin_layout Enumerate
6048 environment resets the counter to one.
6051 \begin_layout Enumerate
6064 \begin_layout Enumerate
6065 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6066 Items can have any length.
6069 \begin_layout Enumerate
6070 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6073 \begin_layout Enumerate
6074 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6077 \begin_layout Enumerate
6078 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6082 \begin_layout Standard
6091 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6093 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6094 labels the four different levels in an
6101 \begin_layout Enumerate
6102 The first level of an
6106 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6110 \begin_layout Enumerate
6111 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6115 \begin_layout Enumerate
6116 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6120 \begin_layout Enumerate
6121 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6124 \begin_layout Enumerate
6125 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6130 \begin_layout Enumerate
6131 Back to the third level
6135 \begin_layout Enumerate
6136 Back to the second level.
6140 \begin_layout Enumerate
6141 Back to the outermost level.
6144 \begin_layout Standard
6145 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6149 environment, see section
6150 \begin_inset space ~
6154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6156 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6161 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6165 \begin_layout Standard
6166 There is more to nesting
6170 environments than we've stated here.
6171 You should read section
6172 \begin_inset space ~
6176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6178 reference "sec:Nesting"
6182 to learn more about nesting.
6185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6187 \begin_inset Index idx
6190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6199 \begin_layout Standard
6200 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6204 list has no fixed label.
6205 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6214 of the first line as the label.
6218 \begin_layout Description
6219 Example: This is an example of the
6226 \begin_layout Standard
6228 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6232 \begin_layout Standard
6234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6241 it is meant that the first usage of the
6245 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6247 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6255 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6260 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6261 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6263 \begin_inset space ~
6269 \begin_inset space ~
6273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6275 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6279 for more information.) Here is an example:
6282 \begin_layout Description
6284 \begin_inset space ~
6287 Example: This one shows how to use a
6290 \begin_inset space ~
6302 \begin_layout Description
6303 Usage: You should use the
6307 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6308 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6310 It's not a good idea to use a
6314 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6315 You're better off using
6327 paragraphs into them.
6330 \begin_layout Description
6331 Nesting: You can nest
6335 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6339 \begin_layout Standard
6340 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6341 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6342 them from the first line.
6345 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6347 \begin_inset Index idx
6350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6359 \begin_layout Standard
6364 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6365 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6369 \begin_layout Standard
6378 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6380 Here are its properties:
6383 \begin_layout Labeling
6384 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6386 \begin_inset space ~
6389 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6398 of each line as the item label.
6403 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6404 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6405 space as described above.
6408 \begin_layout Labeling
6409 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6410 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6411 uses different margins for the item label and the
6412 body of the item text.
6413 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6414 label width plus a little extra space.
6418 \begin_layout Labeling
6419 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6421 \begin_inset space ~
6424 width \SpecialChar LyX
6425 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6426 If the label width is larger, the label
6427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6434 into the first line.
6435 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6436 margin of the rest of the item text.
6439 \begin_layout Labeling
6440 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6442 \begin_inset space ~
6445 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6450 environment has the same left margin.
6451 \begin_inset Newline newline
6454 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6457 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6459 \begin_inset space ~
6464 dialog (toolbar button
6467 arg "layout-paragraph"
6474 \begin_inset space ~
6479 determines the default label width.
6480 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6489 multiple times instead.
6490 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6500 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6503 \begin_inset space ~
6508 every time you alter a label in a
6513 \begin_inset Newline newline
6516 The predefined default width is the length of
6517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6525 \begin_inset space ~
6531 \begin_layout Standard
6536 list the same way as the
6540 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6546 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6550 \begin_layout Standard
6555 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6556 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6558 \begin_inset space ~
6562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6564 reference "sec:Nesting"
6568 to learn about nesting.
6571 \begin_layout Standard
6572 There is yet another feature of the
6576 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6577 left-justifies the item labels by
6579 You can use additional
6583 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6584 justifies the item label.
6589 are documented in section
6590 \begin_inset space ~
6594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6596 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6601 Here are some examples:
6604 \begin_layout Labeling
6605 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6606 Left The default for
6613 \begin_layout Labeling
6614 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6615 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6622 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6625 \begin_layout Labeling
6626 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6627 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6631 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6638 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6641 \begin_layout Subsection
6643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6645 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6650 \begin_inset Index idx
6653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6662 \begin_layout Standard
6663 The features described in this section require that the module
6665 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6667 is loaded in the document settings.
6668 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6674 \begin_inset Index idx
6677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6687 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6688 Custom Enumerate Lists
6689 \begin_inset Index idx
6692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6693 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6701 \begin_layout Standard
6703 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6706 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6709 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6710 There you add the command
6713 \begin_layout Standard
6721 \begin_layout Standard
6733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6734 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6735 Code, look at section
6736 \begin_inset space ~
6740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6742 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6755 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6762 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6763 For capital Roman numerals replace
6775 in the command above.
6776 For Arabic numerals use
6784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6791 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6806 \begin_layout Standard
6808 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6816 You can only number 26
6817 \begin_inset space ~
6820 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6828 \begin_layout Standard
6829 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6830 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6833 \begin_layout Standard
6834 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6837 \begin_layout Enumerate
6838 \begin_inset Argument 1
6841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6867 \begin_layout Enumerate
6868 \begin_inset Argument 1
6871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6894 \begin_layout Enumerate
6899 \begin_layout Enumerate
6900 \begin_inset Argument 1
6903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6927 \begin_layout Enumerate
6928 \begin_inset Argument 1
6931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6957 \begin_layout Standard
6958 For this list these commands were used:
6961 \begin_layout Standard
6972 \begin_inset Newline newline
6980 \begin_inset Newline newline
6988 \begin_inset Newline newline
6998 \begin_layout Standard
7005 makes the label emphasized and
7014 \begin_layout Standard
7015 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7023 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7024 lists until you change the definition.
7032 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7034 \begin_inset Index idx
7037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7038 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7046 \begin_layout Standard
7047 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7050 \begin_layout Enumerate
7051 \begin_inset Argument 1
7054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7073 \begin_inset Note Note
7076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7077 goes back to default numbering
7085 \begin_layout Enumerate
7089 \begin_layout Standard
7093 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7097 \begin_layout Standard
7098 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7103 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7104 to indicate that it is a resumed
7105 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7106 , but in the output.
7109 \begin_layout Standard
7110 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7118 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7127 \begin_layout Standard
7128 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7130 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7131 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7132 of a normal enumeration.
7133 There, insert the command
7136 \begin_layout Standard
7142 \begin_layout Standard
7147 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7151 \begin_layout Enumerate
7155 \begin_layout Enumerate
7159 \begin_layout Standard
7160 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7163 \begin_layout Enumerate
7164 \begin_inset Argument 1
7167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7183 This enumeration starts at 4
7186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7188 \begin_inset Index idx
7191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7200 \begin_layout Standard
7201 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7203 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7206 \begin_layout Itemize
7210 \begin_layout Itemize
7211 with standard spacing
7214 \begin_layout Standard
7215 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7217 Add there the command
7221 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7224 \begin_layout Itemize
7225 \begin_inset Argument 1
7228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7247 \begin_layout Itemize
7251 \begin_layout Itemize
7255 \begin_layout Standard
7256 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7263 \begin_inset Index idx
7266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7274 For more information see its documentation,
7275 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7285 \begin_layout Standard
7286 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7288 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7289 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7293 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7296 \begin_layout Enumerate
7297 \begin_inset Argument 1
7300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7308 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7321 \begin_layout Enumerate
7322 with negative indentation
7325 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7326 Further Customization
7327 \begin_inset Index idx
7330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7331 Lists ! Customization
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 You can also change the style of description lists.
7344 \begin_layout Standard
7350 \begin_layout Standard
7351 changes the description label font, the command
7354 \begin_layout Standard
7360 \begin_layout Standard
7361 sets the list style.
7364 \begin_layout Standard
7365 An example where the command
7368 \begin_layout Standard
7373 itshape, style=nextline
7376 \begin_layout Standard
7380 \begin_layout Description
7382 \begin_inset space ~
7386 \begin_inset Argument 1
7389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7395 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7397 itshape, style=nextline
7407 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7408 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7412 \begin_layout Description
7414 \begin_inset space ~
7417 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7418 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7419 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7422 \begin_layout Standard
7423 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7429 \begin_inset Index idx
7432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7440 For more information see its documentation
7441 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7451 \begin_layout Subsection
7453 \begin_inset Index idx
7456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7465 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7467 \begin_inset space ~
7470 Address: An Overview
7473 \begin_layout Standard
7474 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7475 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7483 \begin_inset space ~
7489 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7490 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7491 gags on the document.
7492 In contrast, you can use the
7499 \begin_inset space ~
7504 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7505 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7509 \begin_layout Standard
7510 Of course, you're not limited to using
7517 \begin_inset space ~
7526 \begin_inset space ~
7531 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7532 some European academic papers.
7535 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7539 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7546 \begin_layout Standard
7551 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7552 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7556 \begin_inset space ~
7561 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7562 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7563 Here's an example of each:
7566 \begin_layout Right Address
7568 \begin_inset Newline newline
7572 \begin_inset Newline newline
7576 \begin_inset Newline newline
7579 When is it? What is today?
7582 \begin_layout Standard
7586 \begin_inset space ~
7592 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7594 the largest block of text on a single line.
7595 Here's an example of the
7602 \begin_layout Address
7604 \begin_inset Newline newline
7607 Where do I send this
7608 \begin_inset Newline newline
7611 Your post office and country
7614 \begin_layout Standard
7615 As you can see, both
7622 \begin_inset space ~
7627 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7632 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7633 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7639 This makes sense, since
7647 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7648 Thus, you have to use
7655 arg "newline-insert newline"
7660 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7661 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7663 \begin_inset space ~
7667 \begin_inset space ~
7672 ) to start a new line in an
7679 \begin_inset space ~
7687 \begin_layout Subsection
7691 \begin_layout Standard
7692 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7693 or list of references.
7695 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7698 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7700 \begin_inset Index idx
7703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7712 \begin_layout Standard
7717 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7718 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7719 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7720 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7734 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7735 The book document classes ignores the
7739 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7743 in a letter document class.
7746 \begin_layout Standard
7751 environment does several things for you.
7752 First, it puts the centered label
7753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7761 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7763 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7764 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7765 the subsequent text.
7766 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7768 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7772 \begin_layout Standard
7773 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7777 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7778 The new paragraph will still be in the
7783 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7784 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7787 \begin_layout Standard
7788 \begin_inset Float figure
7793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7795 \begin_inset Graphics
7796 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7804 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7807 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7809 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7830 \begin_layout Standard
7831 We would love to demonstrate the
7835 environment, but since this document is in the
7836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7843 class, we can't do this.
7844 We inserted it therefore as figure
7845 \begin_inset space ~
7849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7851 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7856 If you have never heard of an
7857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7864 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7867 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7869 \begin_inset Index idx
7872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7881 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7888 \begin_layout Standard
7893 environment is used to list references.
7894 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7895 only use it at the end of the document.
7907 \begin_layout Standard
7908 When you first open a
7912 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7913 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7929 depending on the document class.
7930 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7931 Each paragraph of the
7935 environment is a bibliography entry.
7940 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7941 Each new paragraph is still in the
7948 \begin_layout Standard
7949 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7950 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7952 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7954 handling, have a look at section
7955 \begin_inset space ~
7959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7961 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7968 \begin_layout Subsection
7969 Special Environments
7972 \begin_layout Standard
7974 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7975 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7978 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7983 \begin_inset Index idx
7986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7996 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8003 \begin_layout Standard
8009 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8011 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8016 key as a fixed whitespace.
8020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8033 \begin_inset space ~
8038 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8056 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8059 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8062 arg "newline-insert newline"
8079 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8080 So, when you finish using the
8085 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8086 Also, you can nest the
8091 environment inside of others.
8094 \begin_layout Standard
8095 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8098 \begin_layout Itemize
8102 arg "newline-insert newline"
8105 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8110 \begin_inset space \space{}
8120 arg "newline-insert newline"
8126 \begin_layout Itemize
8130 arg "newline-insert newline"
8140 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8146 \begin_layout Itemize
8147 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8148 You must put at least one
8152 in any line you want blank.
8153 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8157 \begin_layout Itemize
8158 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8162 since that will insert
8167 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8170 arg "self-insert \""
8176 \begin_layout Standard
8180 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8184 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8188 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8192 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8196 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8197 printf("Hello World!
8202 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8206 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8210 \begin_layout Standard
8211 This is just the standard
8212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8223 \begin_layout Standard
8229 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8231 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8232 as if you used a typewriter.
8233 \begin_inset Index idx
8236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8237 Paragraph environments|)
8242 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8245 Program Code Listings
8250 \begin_inset space ~
8258 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8262 \begin_inset Index idx
8265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8274 \begin_layout Standard
8279 environment is similar to the
8284 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8285 computer console text.
8290 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8304 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8305 you can have empty lines.
8318 \begin_layout Itemize
8319 have a certain language and a text style
8322 \begin_layout Itemize
8323 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8324 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8325 and \SpecialChar TeX
8329 \begin_layout Standard
8330 Because of these properties
8334 works like a typewriter.
8338 \begin_layout Verbatim
8342 \begin_layout Verbatim
8345 The following 2 lines are empty:
8348 \begin_layout Verbatim
8352 \begin_layout Verbatim
8356 \begin_layout Verbatim
8357 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8362 \begin_layout Standard
8367 environment is identical to
8371 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8372 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8379 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8383 \begin_layout Section
8384 Nesting Environments
8385 \begin_inset Index idx
8388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8389 Nesting ! Environments
8395 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8404 \begin_layout Subsection
8408 \begin_layout Standard
8410 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8412 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8414 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8416 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8428 \begin_layout Enumerate
8432 \begin_layout Enumerate
8437 \begin_layout Enumerate
8441 \begin_layout Enumerate
8446 \begin_layout Enumerate
8450 \begin_layout Standard
8451 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8452 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8454 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8456 \begin_inset space ~
8460 \begin_inset space ~
8468 \begin_inset space ~
8472 \begin_inset space ~
8477 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8479 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8482 arg "depth-increment"
8488 arg "depth-decrement"
8502 arg "depth-increment"
8508 arg "depth-decrement"
8512 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8513 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8517 \begin_layout Standard
8518 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8519 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8520 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8521 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8522 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8525 \begin_layout Standard
8526 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8528 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8530 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8533 \begin_layout Subsection
8534 What You Can and Can't Nest
8537 \begin_layout Standard
8538 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8539 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8542 \begin_layout Standard
8543 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8544 than a simple yes or no.
8545 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8548 \begin_layout Itemize
8549 Completely unnestable
8552 \begin_layout Itemize
8553 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8557 \begin_layout Itemize
8558 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8562 \begin_layout Standard
8563 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8564 environments have them:
8567 \begin_layout Description
8568 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8569 Can't nest into them.
8573 \begin_layout Itemize
8579 \begin_layout Itemize
8585 \begin_layout Itemize
8591 \begin_layout Itemize
8597 \begin_layout Itemize
8604 \begin_layout Description
8606 \begin_inset space ~
8609 Nestable You can nest them.
8610 You can nest other things into them.
8614 \begin_layout Itemize
8620 \begin_layout Itemize
8626 \begin_layout Itemize
8632 \begin_layout Itemize
8638 \begin_layout Itemize
8644 \begin_layout Itemize
8650 \begin_layout Itemize
8656 \begin_layout Itemize
8663 \begin_layout Itemize
8669 \begin_layout Itemize
8676 \begin_layout Description
8677 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8678 You can't nest anything into them.
8682 \begin_layout Itemize
8688 \begin_layout Itemize
8694 \begin_layout Itemize
8700 \begin_layout Itemize
8706 \begin_layout Itemize
8712 \begin_layout Itemize
8718 \begin_layout Itemize
8724 \begin_layout Itemize
8730 \begin_layout Itemize
8736 \begin_layout Itemize
8742 \begin_layout Itemize
8748 \begin_layout Itemize
8754 \begin_layout Itemize
8760 \begin_layout Itemize
8764 \begin_inset space ~
8770 \begin_layout Itemize
8777 \begin_layout Standard
8778 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8786 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8796 \begin_inset space ~
8799 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8800 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8801 nested section headings violate this.
8809 \begin_layout Subsection
8810 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8811 \begin_inset Index idx
8814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8815 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8823 \begin_layout Standard
8824 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8825 affected by nesting anyhow.
8829 \begin_layout Itemize
8833 \begin_layout Itemize
8837 \begin_layout Itemize
8841 \begin_layout Standard
8843 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8851 Figures and tables in
8855 are not affected by this.
8860 Have a look at section
8861 \begin_inset space ~
8865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8867 reference "sec:Floats"
8871 for more information about
8878 \begin_layout Standard
8880 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8881 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8885 \begin_layout Standard
8886 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8894 of its own, it behaves just like a
8895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8902 paragraph environment.
8903 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8907 \begin_layout Standard
8908 Here's an example with a table:
8911 \begin_layout Enumerate
8916 \begin_layout Enumerate
8917 This is (a) and it's nested.
8921 \begin_layout Standard
8922 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8928 \begin_layout Standard
8930 \begin_inset Tabular
8931 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8932 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8933 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8934 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9018 \begin_layout Standard
9019 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9026 \begin_layout Enumerate
9028 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9032 \begin_layout Enumerate
9036 \begin_layout Standard
9037 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9040 \begin_layout Enumerate
9045 \begin_layout Enumerate
9046 This is (a) and it's nested.
9050 \begin_layout Standard
9051 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9057 \begin_layout Standard
9059 \begin_inset Tabular
9060 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9061 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9062 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9063 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9147 \begin_layout Standard
9148 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9154 \begin_layout Enumerate
9161 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9164 \begin_layout Enumerate
9168 \begin_layout Standard
9169 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9173 \begin_layout Standard
9174 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9177 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9180 \begin_layout Enumerate
9185 \begin_layout Enumerate
9186 This is (a) and it's nested.
9189 \begin_layout Standard
9190 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9196 \begin_layout Standard
9198 \begin_inset Tabular
9199 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9200 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9201 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9202 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9287 \begin_layout Standard
9288 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9294 \begin_layout Enumerate
9296 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9303 \begin_layout Enumerate
9307 \begin_layout Standard
9308 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9314 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9315 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9319 \begin_layout Subsection
9320 Usage and General Features
9323 \begin_layout Standard
9324 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9325 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9334 is the innermost possible depth.
9335 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9338 \begin_layout Enumerate
9339 level #1 – outermost
9343 \begin_layout Enumerate
9348 \begin_layout Enumerate
9353 \begin_layout Enumerate
9358 \begin_layout Itemize
9363 \begin_layout Itemize
9372 \begin_layout Standard
9373 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9374 both of them in the example.
9375 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9385 For example, if we tried to nest another
9390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9397 , we would get errors.
9400 \begin_layout Subsection
9402 \begin_inset Index idx
9405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9414 \begin_layout Standard
9415 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9416 We have several examples of nested environments.
9417 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9421 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9422 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9425 \begin_layout Labeling
9426 \labelwidthstring MMM
9427 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9436 \begin_layout Labeling
9437 \labelwidthstring MMM
9438 #2-a This is level #2.
9439 We created it by using
9442 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9448 arg "depth-increment"
9455 \begin_layout Labeling
9456 \labelwidthstring MMM
9457 #3-a This is level #3.
9458 This time, we just enter
9465 arg "depth-increment"
9469 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9473 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9479 arg "depth-increment"
9486 \begin_layout Standard
9491 environment, nested inside of
9492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9500 So, it's at level #4.
9501 We did this by entering
9504 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9510 arg "depth-increment"
9513 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9518 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9534 \begin_layout Standard
9539 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9542 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9548 \begin_layout Labeling
9549 \labelwidthstring MMM
9550 #4-a This is level #4.
9554 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9557 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9562 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9566 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9571 keep nesting things inside
9572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9583 \begin_layout Labeling
9584 \labelwidthstring MMM
9585 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9590 \begin_layout Labeling
9591 \labelwidthstring MMM
9592 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9593 and this is level #6.
9594 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9598 \begin_layout Labeling
9599 \labelwidthstring MMM
9600 #5-b Back to level #5.
9604 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9610 arg "depth-decrement"
9617 \begin_layout Labeling
9618 \labelwidthstring MMM
9622 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9628 arg "depth-decrement"
9631 , we're back at level #4.
9635 \begin_layout Labeling
9636 \labelwidthstring MMM
9637 #3-b Back to level #3.
9638 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9642 \begin_layout Labeling
9643 \labelwidthstring MMM
9644 #2-b Back to level #2.
9649 \begin_layout Labeling
9650 \labelwidthstring MMM
9651 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9652 After this sentence, we will enter
9656 and change the paragraph environment back to
9663 \begin_layout Standard
9664 We could have also used the
9680 environment in place of the
9685 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9688 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9689 Example 2: Inheritance
9692 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9693 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9696 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9705 arg "depth-increment"
9709 \begin_inset Newline newline
9712 which, we will change to the
9720 \begin_layout Enumerate
9725 environment, at level #2.
9728 \begin_layout Enumerate
9729 Notice how the nested
9733 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9737 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9741 \begin_layout Standard
9742 We ended this example by entering
9747 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9751 and reset the nesting depth by using
9754 arg "depth-decrement"
9760 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9761 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9770 \begin_inset Argument 1
9773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9774 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9782 \begin_layout Enumerate
9783 This is level #1, in an
9787 paragraph environment.
9788 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9792 \begin_layout Enumerate
9797 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9803 arg "depth-increment"
9807 Now, what happens if we nest an
9811 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9812 label be? An asterisk?
9816 \begin_layout Itemize
9826 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9827 So, its label is a bullet.
9828 (We got here by using
9831 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9837 arg "depth-increment"
9840 , then changing the environment to
9848 \begin_layout Itemize
9849 Here's level #4, produced using
9852 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9858 arg "depth-increment"
9862 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9867 \begin_layout Enumerate
9870 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9875 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9879 , because we are in the
9887 environment (that is, it is an
9902 \begin_layout Enumerate
9907 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9908 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9912 \begin_layout Enumerate
9913 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9916 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9919 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9922 \begin_layout Enumerate
9926 arg "depth-decrement"
9929 to decrease the depth after the next
9932 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9939 \begin_layout Enumerate
9941 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9946 \begin_layout Enumerate
9948 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9949 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9953 \begin_layout Enumerate
9954 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9963 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9968 reset the counter for the label.
9972 \begin_layout Enumerate
9976 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9982 arg "depth-decrement"
9985 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9986 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9987 into the twofold-nested
9995 \begin_layout Enumerate
9996 The same thing happens if we do another
9999 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10005 arg "depth-decrement"
10008 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10011 \begin_layout Standard
10012 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10017 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10028 The number of other
10032 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10039 The same rule applies for the
10043 environment, as well.
10046 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10047 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10050 \begin_layout Enumerate
10051 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10052 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10053 the same detail with how we did it.
10062 \begin_layout Standard
10070 arg "depth-increment"
10077 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10078 the example in parentheses someplace.
10079 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10080 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10081 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10085 \begin_layout Enumerate
10090 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10094 \begin_layout Verse
10095 Now we will add verse.
10096 \begin_inset Newline newline
10099 It will get much worse.
10100 \begin_inset Newline newline
10110 arg "depth-increment"
10120 \begin_layout Verse
10121 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10122 \begin_inset Newline newline
10125 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10126 \begin_inset Newline newline
10132 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10140 \begin_layout Verse
10141 Here comes a table:
10145 \begin_layout Standard
10146 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10152 \begin_layout Standard
10154 \begin_inset Tabular
10155 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10156 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10157 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10158 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10243 \begin_layout Verse
10247 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10257 arg "depth-increment"
10263 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10269 \begin_inset Newline newline
10277 arg "depth-decrement"
10284 \begin_layout Enumerate
10289 : level #1) This is another item.
10290 Note that selecting a
10294 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10295 3 times to put the table inside the
10303 \begin_layout Quotation
10304 We're now ending the
10308 list and changing to
10313 We're still at level #1.
10314 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10315 The next set of paragraphs is a
10316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10323 We will nest both the
10330 \begin_inset space ~
10335 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10339 for the letter body.
10343 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10346 to preserve the depth.
10347 Remember that you need to use
10350 arg "newline-insert newline"
10353 to create multiple lines inside the
10360 \begin_inset space ~
10370 \begin_layout Right Address
10372 \begin_inset Newline newline
10375 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10376 \begin_inset Newline newline
10382 \begin_layout Address
10384 \begin_inset space ~
10390 \begin_layout Quotation
10391 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10395 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10396 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10397 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10398 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10399 as soon as possible.
10400 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10403 \begin_layout Quotation
10404 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10405 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10406 with your order, along with payment.
10409 \begin_layout Quotation
10410 We thank you again for your patience.
10413 \begin_layout Address
10415 \begin_inset Newline newline
10422 \begin_layout Quotation
10423 That ends that example!
10426 \begin_layout Standard
10427 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10428 gives you a lot of power with just
10430 We could have easily nested an
10451 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10454 \begin_layout Subsection
10456 \begin_inset Index idx
10459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10460 Nesting ! Separation
10466 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10468 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10475 \begin_layout Standard
10476 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10478 For example you need two different enumerations:
10481 \begin_layout Enumerate
10486 \begin_layout Enumerate
10491 \begin_layout Enumerate
10495 \begin_layout Standard
10496 \begin_inset Separator plain
10502 \begin_layout Itemize
10508 \begin_layout Standard
10509 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10515 \begin_layout Enumerate
10519 \begin_layout Enumerate
10523 \begin_layout Enumerate
10527 \begin_layout Standard
10528 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10529 list item and use the menu
10531 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10532 Start New Environment
10535 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10536 ) and behind it the new list.
10539 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10540 Start New Parent Environment
10542 only appears if the item is nested.
10543 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10547 \begin_layout Standard
10548 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10549 (red arrow in LyX).
10550 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10551 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10554 \begin_layout Standard
10555 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10558 arg "paragraph-break"
10565 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10568 \begin_layout Section
10569 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10570 \begin_inset Index idx
10573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10582 \begin_layout Standard
10583 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10584 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10586 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10587 be broken at the end of a line.
10588 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10592 \begin_layout Subsection
10594 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10596 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10601 \begin_inset Index idx
10604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10613 \begin_layout Standard
10614 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10615 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10616 ) not to break the line at
10618 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10621 \begin_layout Quote
10622 Further documentation is given in section
10623 \begin_inset Newline newline
10627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10629 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10637 \begin_layout Standard
10638 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10653 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10662 A protected space is set with
10664 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10665 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10667 \begin_inset space ~
10675 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10681 \begin_layout Subsection
10683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10685 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10690 \begin_inset Index idx
10693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10694 Spacing ! Horizontal
10702 \begin_layout Standard
10703 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10705 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10706 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10710 The length units are listed in Appendix
10711 \begin_inset space ~
10715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10717 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10724 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10728 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10733 \begin_inset Index idx
10736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10737 Spaces ! Inter-word
10745 \begin_layout Standard
10746 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10747 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10748 at the ends of sentences.
10749 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10750 automatically takes care about this.
10751 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10752 followed by a period; see section
10753 \begin_inset space ~
10757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10759 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10764 To insert a normal space, select
10766 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10767 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10769 \begin_inset space ~
10777 arg "space-insert normal"
10783 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10785 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10787 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10792 \begin_inset Index idx
10795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10804 \begin_layout Standard
10806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10813 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10822 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10823 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10824 inside abbreviations:
10827 \begin_layout Quote
10829 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10833 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10836 \begin_layout Standard
10837 or between values and units.
10838 Compare for example this:
10839 \begin_inset Newline newline
10843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10847 \begin_inset Newline newline
10850 10 kg (normal space
10853 \begin_layout Standard
10854 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10856 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10857 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10859 \begin_inset space ~
10867 arg "space-insert thin"
10873 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10877 \begin_layout Standard
10878 You can also insert the following space types:
10881 \begin_layout Description
10883 \begin_inset space ~
10887 \begin_inset space ~
10890 space A line with a
10891 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10895 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10899 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10902 negative thin space between the arrows.
10905 \begin_layout Description
10907 \begin_inset space ~
10911 \begin_inset space ~
10914 space A line with a
10915 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10919 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10923 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10926 negative medium space between the arrows.
10929 \begin_layout Description
10931 \begin_inset space ~
10935 \begin_inset space ~
10938 space A line with a
10939 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10943 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10947 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10950 negative thick space between the arrows.
10953 \begin_layout Description
10955 \begin_inset space ~
10959 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10963 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10967 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10971 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10975 \begin_inset space ~
10979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10982 em) space between the arrows.
10985 \begin_layout Description
10987 \begin_inset space ~
10991 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10995 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10999 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11003 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11007 \begin_inset space ~
11011 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11014 em) space between the arrows.
11017 \begin_layout Description
11019 \begin_inset space ~
11023 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11027 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11031 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11035 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11039 \begin_inset space ~
11043 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11046 em) space between the arrows.
11049 \begin_layout Description
11051 \begin_inset space ~
11055 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11059 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11064 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11068 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11071 cm space between the arrows.
11074 \begin_layout Standard
11076 \begin_inset space ~
11080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11082 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11086 lists the different space sizes.
11089 \begin_layout Standard
11090 \begin_inset Float table
11095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11096 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11099 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11101 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11105 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11115 \begin_inset Tabular
11116 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11117 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11118 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11119 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11207 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11231 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11235 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11239 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11263 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11287 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11302 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11315 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11371 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11392 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11394 \begin_inset Index idx
11397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11406 \begin_layout Standard
11407 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11408 feature for adding extra space
11409 in a uniform fashion.
11410 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11411 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11412 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11413 equally between themselves.
11416 \begin_layout Standard
11417 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11420 \begin_layout Quote
11422 This is on the left side
11423 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11426 This is on the right
11429 \begin_layout Quote
11432 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11436 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11442 \begin_layout Quote
11445 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11449 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11453 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11459 \begin_layout Standard
11460 That was an example in the
11466 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11470 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11474 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11477 is one in a standard paragraph.
11478 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11482 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11485 \begin_layout Standard
11486 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11489 \begin_inset space ~
11494 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11497 \begin_layout Standard
11499 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11503 \begin_inset space ~
11509 \begin_layout Standard
11511 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11515 \begin_inset space ~
11521 \begin_layout Standard
11523 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11527 \begin_inset space ~
11533 \begin_layout Standard
11535 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11539 \begin_inset space ~
11545 \begin_layout Standard
11547 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11551 \begin_inset space ~
11557 \begin_layout Standard
11559 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11563 \begin_inset space ~
11569 \begin_layout Standard
11570 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11578 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11582 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11584 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11585 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11589 option in the space dialog.
11597 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11601 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11606 \begin_inset Index idx
11609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11618 \begin_layout Standard
11619 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11620 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11623 \begin_layout Standard
11624 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11627 What is correct English?:
11628 \begin_inset Newline newline
11632 \begin_inset Newline newline
11636 \begin_inset space ~
11639 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11640 \begin_inset Newline newline
11644 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11655 \begin_inset Newline newline
11659 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11670 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11676 \begin_layout Standard
11678 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11683 \begin_inset space ~
11687 \begin_inset space ~
11691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11695 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11697 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11698 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11702 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11708 \begin_inset space ~
11712 \begin_inset space ~
11716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11719 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11728 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11729 That is why it is named
11730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11738 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11739 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11743 \begin_layout Subsection
11745 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11747 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11752 \begin_inset Index idx
11755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11764 \begin_layout Standard
11765 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11767 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11768 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11770 \begin_inset space ~
11776 There you find the following sizes:
11779 \begin_layout Standard
11792 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11793 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11798 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11800 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11801 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11803 \begin_inset space ~
11809 \begin_inset Index idx
11812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11813 Document ! Settings
11818 for the paragraph separation.
11819 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11830 \begin_layout Standard
11836 \begin_inset Index idx
11839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11845 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11846 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11851 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11852 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11861 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11870 s are described in section
11871 \begin_inset space ~
11875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11877 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11886 If there are several
11890 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11891 You can therefore use
11895 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11898 \begin_layout Standard
11903 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11904 \begin_inset space ~
11908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11910 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11917 \begin_layout Standard
11918 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11928 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11929 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11941 \begin_layout Subsection
11942 Paragraph Alignment
11943 \begin_inset Index idx
11946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11947 Paragraph ! Alignment
11955 \begin_layout Standard
11956 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11958 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11961 dialog (toolbar button
11964 arg "layout-paragraph"
11968 There are five possibilities:
11971 \begin_layout Itemize
11979 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11985 \begin_layout Itemize
11993 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11999 \begin_layout Itemize
12007 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12013 \begin_layout Itemize
12021 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12027 \begin_layout Itemize
12035 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12041 \begin_layout Standard
12042 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12043 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12044 the left and right margins.
12045 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12048 \begin_layout Standard
12050 This paragraph is right aligned,
12053 \begin_layout Standard
12055 this one is centered,
12058 \begin_layout Standard
12060 this one is left aligned.
12063 \begin_layout Subsection
12065 \begin_inset Index idx
12068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12069 Page breaks ! Forced
12075 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12077 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12084 \begin_layout Standard
12085 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12086 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12087 force a page break where you want one.
12088 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12089 is good at page breaking.
12090 Only if you use a lot of
12094 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12095 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12098 \begin_layout Standard
12099 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12100 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12104 have to change the page breaking.
12107 \begin_layout Standard
12108 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12110 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12112 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12113 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12115 \begin_inset space ~
12121 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12123 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12124 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12126 \begin_inset space ~
12131 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12133 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12134 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12137 \begin_layout Standard
12138 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12139 at the top of a page.
12140 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12142 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12143 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12144 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12148 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12152 to learn more about
12159 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12161 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12163 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12168 \begin_inset Index idx
12171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12172 Page breaks ! Clear
12180 \begin_layout Standard
12181 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12182 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12183 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12184 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12185 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12188 \begin_layout Standard
12189 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12191 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12192 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12194 \begin_inset space ~
12200 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12202 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12203 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12205 \begin_inset space ~
12209 \begin_inset space ~
12214 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12215 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12218 \begin_layout Subsection
12220 \begin_inset Index idx
12223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12232 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12239 \begin_layout Standard
12240 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12242 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12244 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12245 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12247 \begin_inset space ~
12251 \begin_inset space ~
12259 arg "newline-insert newline"
12263 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12265 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12266 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12268 \begin_inset space ~
12272 \begin_inset space ~
12280 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12283 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12285 This is useful to avoid
12286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12293 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12296 \begin_layout Standard
12297 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12298 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12300 very good at line breaking.
12301 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12302 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12303 \begin_inset space ~
12307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12309 reference "sec:Quote"
12314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12316 reference "sec:Verse"
12321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12323 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12330 \begin_layout Subsection
12332 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12334 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12339 \begin_inset Index idx
12342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12351 \begin_layout Standard
12353 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12364 \begin_layout Standard
12368 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12369 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12371 \begin_inset space ~
12376 you can insert horizontal lines.
12377 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12378 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12379 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12382 \begin_layout Standard
12384 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12395 \begin_layout Section
12396 Characters and Symbols
12399 \begin_layout Standard
12400 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12401 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12402 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12404 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12410 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12414 for information on how this is done.
12417 \begin_layout Standard
12418 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12423 dialog via the menu
12425 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12426 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12432 \begin_layout Standard
12433 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12441 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12442 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12444 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12452 \begin_layout Section
12453 Fonts and Text Styles
12454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12456 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12463 \begin_layout Subsection
12465 \begin_inset Index idx
12468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12477 \begin_layout Standard
12478 There are two types of fonts:
12481 \begin_layout Description
12483 \begin_inset space ~
12487 \begin_inset Index idx
12490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12496 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12497 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12501 characters) in the font.
12502 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12503 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12504 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12505 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12506 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12507 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12508 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12509 \begin_inset Newline newline
12512 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12513 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12514 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12515 sizes than at small ones.
12516 \begin_inset Newline newline
12530 \begin_inset space ~
12538 \begin_layout Description
12540 \begin_inset space ~
12544 \begin_inset Index idx
12547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12553 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12554 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12555 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12556 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12557 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12558 image manipulation program.
12559 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12560 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12561 \begin_inset space ~
12564 pixels high up to 34
12565 \begin_inset space ~
12568 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12569 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12570 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12572 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12573 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12574 \begin_inset Newline newline
12577 Bitmap fonts are named
12580 \begin_inset space ~
12585 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12588 \begin_layout Standard
12589 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12590 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12591 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12592 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12593 use scalable fonts.
12596 \begin_layout Standard
12597 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12600 \begin_layout Standard
12601 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12602 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12603 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12604 font to emphasize text, you use an
12605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12613 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12615 In \SpecialChar LyX
12616 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12620 \begin_layout Subsection
12623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12625 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12632 \begin_layout Standard
12633 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12634 used its own fonts.
12635 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12636 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12639 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12640 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12641 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12642 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12643 to a word processor.
12644 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12645 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12646 files are very portable across
12647 different machines.
12648 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12649 has increased a lot
12650 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12653 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12655 \begin_inset space ~
12659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12661 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12666 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12667 code in the document
12668 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12671 \begin_layout Standard
12672 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12673 engines that are also able directly
12674 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12676 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12678 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12680 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12681 that is installed on your system.
12682 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12685 \begin_layout Standard
12686 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12694 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12695 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12703 \begin_layout Subsection
12704 Document Font and Font size
12705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12707 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12712 \begin_inset Index idx
12715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12722 \begin_inset Index idx
12725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12734 \begin_layout Standard
12735 You can set the document fonts in the
12737 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12741 \begin_inset Index idx
12744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12745 Document ! Settings
12755 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12756 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12759 \begin_inset space ~
12768 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12770 \begin_inset space ~
12773 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12776 \begin_layout Standard
12781 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12782 This requires that you use
12794 as the output format, i.
12795 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12799 \begin_inset space \space{}
12802 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12803 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12804 installed (see section
12805 \begin_inset space ~
12809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12811 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12816 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12818 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12819 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12821 \begin_inset space ~
12824 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12825 cannot determine the family.
12826 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12827 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12830 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12833 \begin_layout Standard
12834 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12835 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12840 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12846 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12847 With LyX's default font encoding, this is a look-alike of the standard
12850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12856 \begin_inset space ~
12862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12887 European Computer Modern
12890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12898 However, some classes set different default fonts.
12901 \begin_layout Standard
12906 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
12907 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12912 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
12915 \begin_inset space ~
12920 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12926 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12927 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12930 \begin_layout Itemize
12934 \begin_inset space ~
12939 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12952 \begin_inset space ~
12957 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12958 community in order to replace
12962 as the default font.
12963 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12964 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12967 \begin_inset space ~
12980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12981 One difference is improved kerning.
12989 \begin_layout Itemize
12990 If you do not like the look of
12998 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12999 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13003 \begin_inset space ~
13009 \begin_inset space ~
13019 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13020 \begin_inset space ~
13023 serif and typewriter fonts,
13027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13028 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13029 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13035 \begin_inset space ~
13044 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13045 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13049 \begin_inset space \space{}
13057 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13061 \begin_inset space \space{}
13067 \begin_inset space ~
13075 \begin_inset space ~
13085 but you can also select your own.
13086 \begin_inset Newline newline
13089 The differences between roman,
13092 \begin_inset space ~
13101 fonts are explained in section
13102 \begin_inset space ~
13106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13108 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13113 \begin_inset Newline newline
13119 \begin_inset space ~
13124 was originally designed for newspapers.
13125 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13126 into the small newspaper columns.
13130 \begin_inset space ~
13135 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13138 \begin_layout Standard
13139 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13152 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13157 depends on the class you are using.
13158 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13161 \begin_layout Standard
13162 Note that the font size is the
13167 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13168 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13169 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13170 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13173 \begin_inset space ~
13179 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13180 \begin_inset space ~
13184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13186 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13193 \begin_layout Standard
13197 \begin_inset space ~
13202 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13204 \begin_inset space ~
13207 serif or typewriter.
13212 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13222 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13225 \begin_layout Standard
13230 LaTeX font encoding
13232 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13233 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13239 \begin_inset Index idx
13242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13250 \begin_inset space ~
13254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13256 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13261 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13262 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13269 \begin_layout Standard
13270 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13272 Use Old Style Figures
13276 Use True Small Caps
13279 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13282 Use Old Style Figures
13284 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13286 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13287 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13294 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13298 Use True Small Caps
13300 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13301 of scaled capitals.
13302 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13303 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13306 \begin_layout Standard
13311 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13312 a font to display the script characters.
13316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13317 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13323 \begin_inset Index idx
13326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13333 So this has no effect for the document language
13349 \begin_layout Standard
13352 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13354 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13355 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13361 \begin_inset Index idx
13364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13366 packages ! microtype
13374 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
13376 outputs en- and em-dashes as ligatures (--, ---) instead of a sigle character.
13379 \begin_layout Standard
13380 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13384 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13392 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13397 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13398 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13400 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13402 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13405 dialog, see section
13406 \begin_inset space ~
13410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13412 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13424 \begin_layout Subsection
13428 \begin_layout Standard
13429 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13430 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13432 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13433 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13434 choose a math font in the dialog
13436 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13440 \begin_inset Index idx
13443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13444 Document ! Settings
13450 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13451 automatically selects a math font.
13452 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13453 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13462 \begin_inset space ~
13468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13473 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13474 document font is available.
13477 \begin_layout Standard
13478 Note that the math font will not be used for
13482 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13488 or by the insertion of the command
13495 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13496 \begin_inset space ~
13500 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13501 while the math characters do not.
13503 \begin_inset space ~
13506 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13509 \begin_inset space ~
13517 \begin_inset space ~
13522 in the document font settings.
13525 \begin_layout Standard
13526 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13527 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13528 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13529 font (in most cases
13530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13536 \begin_inset space ~
13542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13545 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13546 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13554 \begin_inset space ~
13560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13566 \begin_layout Subsection
13567 Using Different Character Styles
13568 \begin_inset Index idx
13571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13578 \begin_inset Index idx
13581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13590 \begin_layout Standard
13591 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13592 automatically changes the character style for certain
13593 paragraph environments.
13595 supports two character styles,
13604 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13608 \begin_layout Standard
13613 style, do one of the following:
13616 \begin_layout Itemize
13617 click on the toolbar button
13626 \begin_layout Itemize
13627 use the key binding
13636 \begin_layout Standard
13637 These commands are all toggles.
13642 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13645 \begin_layout Standard
13646 One typically uses the
13650 style for proper names.
13652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13659 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13667 \begin_layout Standard
13668 A more widely used character style is the
13673 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13680 \begin_layout Itemize
13681 clicking on the toolbar button
13690 \begin_layout Itemize
13691 using the keybindings
13700 \begin_layout Standard
13705 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13707 use a different font.
13710 \begin_layout Standard
13711 We've been using the
13715 style all over the place in this document.
13716 Here's one more example:
13719 \begin_layout Quotation
13722 Do not overuse character styles!
13725 \begin_layout Standard
13726 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13727 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13728 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13729 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13733 \begin_layout Standard
13734 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13742 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13744 \begin_inset space ~
13747 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13753 arg "dialog-show character"
13759 \begin_layout Subsection
13760 Fine-Tuning with the
13765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13767 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13772 \begin_inset Index idx
13775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13784 \begin_layout Standard
13785 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13787 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13788 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13789 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13790 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13791 from ordinary dialog.
13794 \begin_layout Standard
13795 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13796 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13797 \begin_inset Newline newline
13800 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13801 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13804 \begin_layout Standard
13805 To use custom character styles, open the
13807 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13809 \begin_inset space ~
13812 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13815 dialog or press the toolbar button
13818 arg "dialog-show character"
13822 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13823 font property that you can choose.
13824 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13827 \begin_inset space ~
13832 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13837 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13838 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13839 environments all at once.
13842 \begin_layout Standard
13843 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13846 \begin_inset space ~
13858 \begin_layout Labeling
13859 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13873 The possible options are:
13877 \begin_layout Labeling
13878 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13883 This is the Roman font family.
13884 Normally a serif font.
13885 It's also the default family.
13895 \begin_layout Labeling
13896 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13900 \begin_inset space ~
13907 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13919 \begin_layout Labeling
13920 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13927 This is the Typewriter font family.
13933 arg "font-typewriter"
13942 \begin_layout Labeling
13943 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13948 This corresponds to the print weight.
13953 \begin_layout Labeling
13954 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13959 This is the Medium font series.
13960 It's also the default series.
13963 \begin_layout Labeling
13964 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13971 This is the Bold font series.
13984 \begin_layout Labeling
13985 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13990 As the name implies.
13995 \begin_layout Labeling
13996 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14001 This is the Upright font shape.
14002 It's also the default shape.
14005 \begin_layout Labeling
14006 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14020 s the Italic font shape
14026 \begin_layout Labeling
14027 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14034 This is the Slanted font shape
14036 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14037 , this is different from italic).
14040 \begin_layout Labeling
14041 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14045 \begin_inset space ~
14052 This is the Small caps font shape
14059 \begin_layout Labeling
14060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14065 Alters the text color.
14066 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14070 \begin_inset space ~
14075 , which means that the document default color set in
14077 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14078 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14084 \begin_inset space ~
14089 is used, you can choose between
14166 \begin_inset Index idx
14169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14178 \begin_layout Labeling
14179 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14184 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14185 the language of the document.
14186 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14187 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14189 \begin_inset Newline newline
14192 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14194 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14195 When using the spell checking (see section
14196 \begin_inset space ~
14200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14202 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14206 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14209 \begin_layout Labeling
14210 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14215 Alters the size of the font.
14216 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14217 proportional to the document font size.
14218 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14219 the details, but a general description of what
14225 \begin_layout Labeling
14226 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14247 arg "font-size tiny"
14253 \begin_layout Labeling
14254 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14275 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14281 \begin_layout Labeling
14282 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14303 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14309 \begin_layout Labeling
14310 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14331 arg "font-size small"
14337 \begin_layout Labeling
14338 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14352 It's also the default size.
14356 arg "font-size normal"
14362 \begin_layout Labeling
14363 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14384 arg "font-size large"
14390 \begin_layout Labeling
14391 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14412 arg "font-size larger"
14418 \begin_layout Labeling
14419 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14440 arg "font-size largest"
14446 \begin_layout Labeling
14447 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14468 arg "font-size huge"
14474 \begin_layout Labeling
14475 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14496 arg "font-size giant"
14502 \begin_layout Labeling
14503 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14508 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14528 arg "font-size increase"
14534 \begin_layout Labeling
14535 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14540 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14560 arg "font-size decrease"
14567 \begin_layout Standard
14572 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14573 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14575 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14576 — use those instead.
14577 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14580 \begin_layout Labeling
14581 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14586 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14591 \begin_layout Labeling
14592 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14599 This is text with emphasize on
14602 This might seem like the same as
14606 , but it is actually a bit different.
14612 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14614 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14617 \begin_layout Labeling
14618 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14625 This is text with Underbar on.
14631 arg "font-underline"
14637 \begin_inset Newline newline
14642 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14643 when you could not change fonts.
14644 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14645 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14646 because some people
14650 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14653 \begin_layout Labeling
14654 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14658 \begin_inset space ~
14665 This is text with Double underbar on.
14671 arg "font-underunderline"
14675 \begin_inset Newline newline
14678 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14679 about double underbar.
14682 \begin_layout Labeling
14683 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14687 \begin_inset space ~
14694 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14700 arg "font-underwave"
14704 \begin_inset Newline newline
14707 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14708 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14711 \begin_layout Labeling
14712 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14716 \begin_inset space ~
14723 This is text with Strikeout on.
14729 arg "font-strikeout"
14733 \begin_inset Newline newline
14736 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14737 changed in the meantime.
14740 \begin_layout Labeling
14741 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14745 \begin_inset space ~
14752 This is text with Cross out on.
14755 \begin_inset Newline newline
14758 This is used to make text hardly readable.
14761 \begin_layout Labeling
14762 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14769 This is text with Noun on.
14776 , this is a logical attribute.
14777 Normally it's equivalent to
14780 \begin_inset space ~
14789 \begin_layout Standard
14790 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14791 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14793 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14795 \begin_inset space ~
14798 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14804 arg "dialog-show character"
14807 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14808 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14811 arg "textstyle-apply"
14815 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14819 \begin_layout Standard
14820 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14827 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14828 (suppose you just set the shape to
14829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14847 \begin_inset space ~
14859 \begin_layout Standard
14860 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14868 \begin_inset space ~
14880 \begin_layout Itemize
14886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14893 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14911 \begin_inset Newline newline
14915 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14929 \begin_inset Note Note
14932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14933 For more on phantoms see section
14934 \begin_inset space ~
14938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14940 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14950 \begin_inset Newline newline
14956 \begin_layout Itemize
14961 fonts use characters with serifs.
14962 These are the small
14963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14970 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14971 The following example shows the difference:
14972 \begin_inset Newline newline
14976 \begin_inset Newline newline
14981 text without serifs
14984 \begin_inset Newline newline
14987 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14988 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14995 \begin_layout Itemize
15000 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15001 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15002 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15005 \begin_layout Standard
15006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15013 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15014 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15017 \begin_inset space ~
15022 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15023 the property to be removed.
15024 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15025 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15026 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15044 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15045 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15053 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15057 \begin_inset space ~
15062 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15073 If you, for example, set
15074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15092 \begin_inset space ~
15097 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15106 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15109 \begin_layout Standard
15110 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15111 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15114 \begin_layout Section
15115 Printing and Previewing
15118 \begin_layout Subsection
15122 \begin_layout Standard
15123 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15124 using \SpecialChar LyX
15125 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15126 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15127 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15128 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15130 Additional Features
15135 \begin_layout Standard
15137 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15140 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15141 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15142 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15145 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15146 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15147 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15148 to turn your writing into printable output.
15149 This happens in two stages:
15152 \begin_layout Enumerate
15153 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15154 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15156 a file with the extension,
15157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15171 \begin_layout Enumerate
15172 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15173 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15174 to use the commands in the
15178 file to produce printable output.
15181 \begin_layout Subsection
15182 Output file formats
15183 \begin_inset Index idx
15186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15193 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15195 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15202 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15203 Simple text (ASCII)
15204 \begin_inset Index idx
15207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15208 File formats ! ASCII
15216 \begin_layout Standard
15217 This file type has the extension
15218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15230 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15234 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15241 \begin_layout Standard
15242 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15244 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15245 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15247 \begin_inset space ~
15253 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15254 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15255 bibliography (section
15256 \begin_inset space ~
15260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15262 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15267 If your document includes such material, use
15269 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15270 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15272 \begin_inset space ~
15276 \begin_inset space ~
15280 \begin_inset space ~
15288 \begin_inset space ~
15292 \begin_inset space ~
15298 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15299 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15302 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15305 \begin_inset Index idx
15308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15309 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15318 \begin_layout Standard
15319 This file type has the extension
15320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15331 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15334 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15335 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15336 -Errors or to process it manually
15337 with console commands.
15338 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15339 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15340 's temporary directory whenever you
15341 view or export your document.
15344 \begin_layout Standard
15345 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15346 -file using the menu
15348 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15349 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15353 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15354 export variants are explained in section
15355 \begin_inset space ~
15359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15361 reference "subsec:Export"
15368 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15370 \begin_inset Index idx
15373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15382 \begin_layout Standard
15383 This file type has the extension
15384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15404 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15405 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15406 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15410 \begin_layout Standard
15411 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15412 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15413 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15414 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15415 when you view the DVI.
15416 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15419 \begin_layout Standard
15420 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15422 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15423 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15428 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15429 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15431 \begin_inset space ~
15437 The latter option uses the program
15439 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15445 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15448 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15449 font access (see section
15450 \begin_inset space ~
15454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15456 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15461 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15462 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15467 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15469 \begin_inset Index idx
15472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15473 File formats ! PostScript
15481 \begin_layout Standard
15482 This file type has the extension
15483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15495 PostScript was developed by the company
15499 as a printer language.
15500 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15502 PostScript can be seen as a
15503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15506 programming language
15507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15510 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15515 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15522 \begin_inset Index idx
15525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15527 packages ! pstricks
15537 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15540 \begin_layout Standard
15541 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15545 Encapsulated PostScript
15546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15549 (EPS, file extension
15550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15562 As \SpecialChar LyX
15563 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15564 convert them in the background to EPS.
15565 If, for example, you have 50
15566 \begin_inset space ~
15569 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15571 \begin_inset space ~
15574 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15575 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15577 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15578 EPS to avoid this problem.
15581 \begin_layout Standard
15582 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15584 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15585 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15591 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15593 \begin_inset Index idx
15596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15603 \begin_inset Index idx
15606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15615 \begin_layout Standard
15616 This file type has the extension
15617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15633 Portable Document Format
15634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15641 was derived from PostScript.
15642 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15651 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15652 looks exactly the same.
15655 \begin_layout Standard
15656 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15660 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15664 (JPG, file extension
15665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15692 Portable Network Graphics
15693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15696 (PNG, file extension
15697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15709 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15710 converts them in the
15711 background to one of these formats.
15712 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15713 will slow down your workflow.
15714 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15717 \begin_layout Standard
15718 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15720 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15726 \begin_layout Description
15728 \begin_inset space ~
15731 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15735 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15738 \begin_layout Description
15740 \begin_inset space ~
15747 ) This uses the program
15749 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15752 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15755 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15758 is a new engine, derived from
15762 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15763 access (see section
15764 \begin_inset space ~
15768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15770 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15775 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15776 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15781 \begin_layout Description
15783 \begin_inset space ~
15790 ) This uses the program
15795 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15801 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15802 font access (see section
15803 \begin_inset space ~
15807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15809 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15814 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15815 vertically written Japanese.
15818 \begin_layout Description
15820 \begin_inset space ~
15823 (cropped) This is the same as
15826 \begin_inset space ~
15831 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15832 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15833 to generate good-looking
15834 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15837 \begin_layout Description
15839 \begin_inset space ~
15842 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15846 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15850 \begin_layout Description
15852 \begin_inset space ~
15855 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15859 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15860 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15864 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15865 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15868 \begin_layout Standard
15872 \begin_inset space ~
15881 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15882 works without problems.
15883 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15884 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15888 \begin_inset space ~
15896 \begin_inset space ~
15901 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15909 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15911 \begin_inset Index idx
15914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15915 FileFormats ! XHTML
15921 \begin_inset Index idx
15924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15933 \begin_layout Standard
15934 This file type has the extension
15935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15947 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15948 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15949 When \SpecialChar LyX
15950 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15951 suitable for the purpose.
15952 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15954 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15955 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15958 between different formats, which are described in section
15960 Math Output in XHTML
15965 \begin_inset space ~
15973 \begin_layout Standard
15974 XHTML output remains
15975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15982 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15983 features are supported yet.
15987 and the World Wide Web
15991 Additional Features
15993 manual, for more information.
15996 \begin_layout Standard
15997 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15999 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16000 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16006 \begin_layout Subsection
16008 \begin_inset Index idx
16011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16020 \begin_layout Standard
16021 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16022 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16031 or use the toolbar button
16038 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16039 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16040 \begin_inset space ~
16044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16046 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16050 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16052 \begin_inset space ~
16056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16058 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16063 Further output formats can be selected via
16065 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16066 View (Other Formats)
16068 or the toolbar button
16077 \begin_layout Standard
16078 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16079 viewer window using the menu
16081 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16086 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16087 Update (Other Formats)
16092 \begin_layout Standard
16093 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16096 To have a real output, export your document.
16099 \begin_layout Section
16100 A few Words about Typography
16101 \begin_inset Index idx
16104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16113 \begin_layout Subsection
16114 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16115 \begin_inset Index idx
16118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16125 \begin_inset Index idx
16128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16137 \begin_layout Standard
16138 In \SpecialChar LyX
16140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16151 symbol comes in four variants: the
16168 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16174 \begin_layout Standard
16175 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16185 height_special "totalheight"
16190 backgroundcolor "none"
16193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16194 \begin_inset Tabular
16195 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16196 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16197 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
16198 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16199 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16200 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16201 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16229 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16230 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16269 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16270 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16292 system key combination
16296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16297 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
16300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16309 and the em dash with
16312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16325 is the Mac label for the right
16334 Alternatively, dashes can be inserted with
16336 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16338 \begin_inset space ~
16341 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16353 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
16354 and 2014 for the en dash).
16360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16373 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16374 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16396 system key combination or
16397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16411 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16424 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16463 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16469 \begin_layout Standard
16470 Dashes can also be inserted with
16472 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16474 \begin_inset space ~
16477 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16492 \begin_layout Standard
16493 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
16494 mode and has a length of its own.
16495 Here are some examples:
16498 \begin_layout Enumerate
16499 line- and page-breaks
16500 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16510 \begin_layout Enumerate
16512 \begin_inset space ~
16516 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16526 \begin_layout Enumerate
16527 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
16528 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16538 \begin_layout Enumerate
16539 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16543 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16553 \begin_layout Standard
16555 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16557 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
16558 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
16566 \begin_layout Subsection
16567 Dashes and line breaks
16568 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16570 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
16577 \begin_layout Standard
16578 Whether line breaks around dashes are allowed depends on the use case and
16582 \begin_layout Itemize
16583 No line breaks are allowed in ranges of values like A–Z or 1975–1982.
16586 \begin_layout Itemize
16587 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
16591 \begin_layout Itemize
16592 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
16593 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
16596 \begin_layout Standard
16597 When using spaced en dashes
16598 \begin_inset space ~
16601 - common in British English
16602 \begin_inset space ~
16605 - line breaks before the dash can be prevented with protected spaces.
16608 \begin_layout Standard
16609 When using em dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16610 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16612 optional line breaks with the menu
16614 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16615 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16616 Optional line break
16621 \begin_layout Standard
16622 For documents containing many em dashes, you may consider to select the
16625 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16626 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16627 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
16628 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures.
16631 This forces the output of dashes as
16632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16647 when exporting to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16649 The \SpecialChar TeX
16650 font ligature mechanism converts them to dash characters followed
16651 by an optional line break.
16654 \begin_layout Standard
16658 \begin_layout Enumerate
16659 This results in optional line breaks after
16664 Incorrect line breaks must be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
16668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16671 Prevent Hyphenation
16676 \begin_inset space ~
16692 in \SpecialChar TeX
16698 \begin_layout Itemize
16700 \begin_inset space ~
16704 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16714 height_special "totalheight"
16719 backgroundcolor "none"
16722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16731 \begin_layout Itemize
16735 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16745 height_special "totalheight"
16750 backgroundcolor "none"
16753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16757 \begin_inset space ~
16765 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
16766 \begin_inset space ~
16769 – sont très utiles.
16772 \begin_layout Itemize
16779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16788 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
16791 \begin_layout Standard
16792 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
16793 \begin_inset space ~
16796 – in contrast to an overfull line
16797 \begin_inset space ~
16800 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16805 \begin_layout Enumerate
16806 The setting is ignored for documents using non-\SpecialChar TeX
16811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16817 XeTeXdashbreakstate
16820 The default causes dashes to behave like ligature dashes.
16821 The usual behaviour of literal dashes can be achieved by inserting
16826 XeTeXdashbreakstate=0
16829 into the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16838 \begin_layout Enumerate
16854 \begin_layout Enumerate
16855 Hyphenation is suppressed in words adjacent to hyphens and ligature dashes.
16858 \begin_layout Standard
16859 Since \SpecialChar LyX
16861 \begin_inset space ~
16864 2.2, -- and --- are exported to LaTeX as -{}- and -{}-{}- to prevent ligation
16869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16870 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
16872 \begin_inset space ~
16875 2.1, -- and --- was output unchanged which led to different look in \SpecialChar LyX
16877 export, HTML export and the PDF export.
16882 Occurrences in older documents are converted to literal Unicode dashes.
16883 This led to different line breaks in some documents.
16886 \begin_inset space ~
16889 2.3 provides the option
16891 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
16895 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16896 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16900 It is on by default but unselected when opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
16902 \begin_inset space ~
16906 \begin_inset Newline newline
16909 Note the following side-effects of the changes in \SpecialChar LyX
16913 \begin_layout Itemize
16914 If you used literal em- and en dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
16916 \begin_inset space ~
16919 2.2 documents, you must manually unselect
16921 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
16923 to ensure unchanged behavior.
16927 \begin_layout Itemize
16928 If you used both, literal and ligature dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
16930 \begin_inset space ~
16933 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
16934 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behaviour.
16937 \begin_layout Itemize
16938 Zero-width space (ZWSP) characters in older \SpecialChar LyX
16939 documents that follow literal
16940 em- and en-dashes are removed during the conversion to the format of \SpecialChar LyX
16942 \begin_inset space ~
16946 If you used them as optional line breaks after dashes, convert them to
16947 space insets before opening your document with \SpecialChar LyX
16949 \begin_inset space ~
16952 2.3 or the optional line breaks will be lost.
16955 \begin_layout Subsection
16957 \begin_inset Index idx
16960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16967 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16969 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16976 \begin_layout Standard
16977 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16978 but automatically in the output.
16979 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16985 \begin_inset Index idx
16988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16995 following the rules of the document language.
16998 \begin_layout Standard
17000 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
17004 font and with unusual constructs, like
17005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17013 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
17014 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
17015 This is done with the menu
17017 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17018 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17020 \begin_inset space ~
17026 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17028 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17032 \begin_layout Standard
17033 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
17034 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
17036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17045 would then see the hyphen
17046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17053 as a hyphenation possibility.
17054 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
17055 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can use a protected
17058 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17059 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17062 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
17064 Prevent Hyphenation
17069 \begin_inset space ~
17077 \begin_layout Subsection
17079 \begin_inset Index idx
17082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17091 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17092 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
17093 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17095 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
17102 \begin_layout Standard
17103 When \SpecialChar LyX
17104 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17105 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17107 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
17110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17113 appropriate amount of space.
17114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17117 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
17119 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
17120 gets after another word.
17123 \begin_layout Standard
17124 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
17125 not work in all cases.
17127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17138 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
17139 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
17142 \begin_layout Standard
17143 Here are some examples of
17147 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
17150 \begin_layout Itemize
17155 \begin_layout Itemize
17160 \begin_layout Standard
17161 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
17164 \begin_layout Itemize
17166 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17170 this is too much space!
17173 \begin_layout Itemize
17178 \begin_layout Standard
17179 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
17182 \begin_layout Standard
17183 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
17186 \begin_layout Enumerate
17190 \begin_inset space ~
17195 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
17196 \begin_inset space ~
17200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17202 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
17207 \begin_inset Index idx
17210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17211 Spaces ! inter-word
17219 \begin_layout Enumerate
17223 \begin_inset space ~
17228 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
17229 \begin_inset space ~
17233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17235 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
17240 \begin_inset Index idx
17243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17252 \begin_layout Enumerate
17256 \begin_inset space ~
17260 \begin_inset space ~
17264 \begin_inset space ~
17271 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17273 \begin_inset space ~
17278 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
17279 This function is also bound to
17282 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
17288 \begin_layout Standard
17289 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
17292 \begin_layout Itemize
17294 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17298 \begin_inset space \space{}
17301 this is too much space!
17304 \begin_layout Itemize
17305 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
17309 \begin_layout Standard
17310 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
17311 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
17313 will take care of this.
17316 \begin_layout Standard
17317 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
17321 \begin_inset space ~
17327 feature described in the section
17329 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
17334 Additional Features
17339 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17341 \begin_inset Index idx
17344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17345 Typography ! Quotation marks
17351 \begin_inset Index idx
17354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17355 Quotation marks | see
17359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17385 \begin_layout Standard
17387 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
17388 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
17389 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
17391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17399 The keyboard character,
17403 , generates this automatically.
17406 \begin_layout Standard
17407 You can specify what character the
17411 key produces by using the submenu
17417 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17421 \begin_inset Index idx
17424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17425 Document ! Settings
17430 dialog and switching the
17434 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17435 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
17437 \begin_inset space ~
17443 \begin_layout Labeling
17444 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17456 \begin_inset space ~
17460 \begin_inset space ~
17464 \begin_inset Quotes els
17468 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17482 \begin_inset Quotes els
17486 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17489 quotation marks (as common, e.
17490 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17496 \begin_layout Labeling
17497 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17500 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17504 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17508 \begin_inset space ~
17512 \begin_inset space ~
17516 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17520 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17526 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17530 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17534 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17538 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17541 quotation marks (as common, e.
17542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17548 \begin_layout Labeling
17549 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17552 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17556 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17560 \begin_inset space ~
17564 \begin_inset space ~
17568 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17572 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17578 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17582 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17586 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17590 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17593 quotation marks (as common, e.
17594 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17600 \begin_layout Labeling
17601 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17604 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17608 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17612 \begin_inset space ~
17616 \begin_inset space ~
17620 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17624 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17630 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17634 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17638 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17642 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17645 quotation marks (as common, e.
17646 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17652 \begin_layout Labeling
17653 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17656 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17660 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17664 \begin_inset space ~
17668 \begin_inset space ~
17672 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17676 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17682 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17686 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17690 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17694 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17697 quotation marks (as common, e.
17698 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17701 g., in Switzerland)
17704 \begin_layout Labeling
17705 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17708 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17712 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17716 \begin_inset space ~
17720 \begin_inset space ~
17724 \begin_inset Quotes als
17728 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17734 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17738 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17742 \begin_inset Quotes als
17746 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17749 quotation marks (as common, e.
17750 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17756 \begin_layout Labeling
17757 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17760 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17764 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17768 \begin_inset space ~
17772 \begin_inset space ~
17776 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17780 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17786 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17790 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17794 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17798 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17801 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17804 \begin_layout Labeling
17805 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17808 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17812 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17816 \begin_inset space ~
17820 \begin_inset space ~
17824 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17828 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17834 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17838 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17842 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17846 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17849 quotation marks (as common, e.
17850 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17853 g., in Great Britain)
17856 \begin_layout Labeling
17857 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17860 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17864 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17868 \begin_inset space ~
17872 \begin_inset space ~
17876 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17880 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17886 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17890 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17894 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17898 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17901 quotation marks (as common, e.
17902 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17908 \begin_layout Labeling
17909 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17912 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17916 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17920 \begin_inset space ~
17924 \begin_inset space ~
17928 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17932 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17938 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17942 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17946 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17950 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17953 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17958 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17959 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17960 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17961 the inner marks differ).
17969 \begin_layout Labeling
17970 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17973 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17977 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17981 \begin_inset space ~
17985 \begin_inset space ~
17989 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17993 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17999 \begin_inset Quotes rld
18003 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
18007 \begin_inset Quotes rls
18011 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18014 quotation marks (as common, e.
18015 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18021 \begin_layout Labeling
18022 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18025 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18029 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18033 \begin_inset space ~
18037 \begin_inset space ~
18041 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18045 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18051 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18055 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18059 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18063 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18066 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
18069 \begin_layout Labeling
18070 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18071 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18079 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18085 \begin_inset space ~
18089 \begin_inset space ~
18095 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18103 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18107 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18111 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18115 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18119 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18122 quotation marks (as common, e.
18123 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18131 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18132 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18140 \begin_layout Labeling
18141 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18142 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18150 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18156 \begin_inset space ~
18160 \begin_inset space ~
18166 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18174 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18178 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18182 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18186 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18190 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18193 quotation marks (as common, e.
18194 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18197 g., in North Korea and China)
18201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18202 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18203 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18211 \begin_layout Standard
18212 Inner quotation marks
18216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18217 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18218 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18219 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18227 does not necessarily mean
18228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18236 This is why we call them
18237 \begin_inset Quotes els
18241 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18257 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18259 \begin_inset Quotes els
18263 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18266 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
18269 arg "quote-insert inner"
18274 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18280 \begin_layout Standard
18281 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18282 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18283 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18284 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18285 If you check the setting
18287 Use dynamic quotation marks
18291 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18292 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18295 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18296 they appear in a special color).
18297 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18298 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18300 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18303 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18306 \begin_layout Standard
18307 Individual quotation marks (i.
18308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18311 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18312 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18316 \begin_layout Subsection
18318 \begin_inset Index idx
18321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18322 Typography ! Ligatures
18328 \begin_inset Index idx
18331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18360 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18362 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18369 \begin_layout Standard
18370 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18371 print them as single characters.
18372 These groups are known as
18377 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18378 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18380 Here are the standard ligatures:
18383 \begin_layout Itemize
18387 \begin_layout Itemize
18391 \begin_layout Itemize
18395 \begin_layout Itemize
18399 \begin_layout Itemize
18403 \begin_layout Standard
18404 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18407 \begin_layout Standard
18408 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18409 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18417 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18433 To break a ligature, use
18435 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18436 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18438 \begin_inset space ~
18445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18456 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18473 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18481 \begin_layout Subsection
18483 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18485 \begin_inset Index idx
18488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18498 \begin_layout Standard
18501 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18502 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18506 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18509 \begin_layout Description
18511 The name of the game.
18514 \begin_layout Description
18516 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18520 \begin_layout Description
18522 The \SpecialChar TeX
18523 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18527 \begin_layout Description
18528 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18529 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18533 \begin_layout Standard
18534 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18540 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18548 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18549 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18550 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18551 converges to the number
18552 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18555 : The actual version is
18556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18564 , the previous one was
18565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18576 \begin_layout Subsection
18578 \begin_inset Index idx
18581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18590 \begin_layout Standard
18591 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18592 space between two words.
18593 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18603 for units use the menu
18605 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18606 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18608 \begin_inset space ~
18616 arg "space-insert thin"
18622 \begin_layout Standard
18623 Here is an example to show the differences:
18626 \begin_layout Standard
18627 \begin_inset Tabular
18628 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18629 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18630 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18631 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18638 \begin_inset space ~
18642 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18654 space between number and unit
18661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18666 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18670 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18682 half space between number and unit
18695 \begin_layout Subsection
18697 \begin_inset Index idx
18700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18701 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18709 \begin_layout Standard
18710 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18712 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18713 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18714 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18715 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18716 These bits of text became known as
18727 \begin_layout Standard
18728 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18729 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18730 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18731 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18732 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18733 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18734 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18735 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18736 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18737 \begin_inset Newline newline
18745 \begin_inset Newline newline
18753 \begin_inset Newline newline
18756 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18757 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18758 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18760 \begin_inset space ~
18764 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18766 key "latexcompanion"
18772 \begin_inset space ~
18776 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18783 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18784 's page break mechanism.
18787 \begin_layout Chapter
18788 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18789 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18791 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18798 \begin_layout Standard
18799 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18802 \begin_inset space ~
18808 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18811 \begin_layout Section
18813 \begin_inset Index idx
18816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18823 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18832 \begin_layout Standard
18834 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18837 \begin_layout Description
18840 \begin_inset space ~
18843 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18844 \begin_inset Newline newline
18848 \begin_inset Note Note
18851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18852 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18860 \begin_layout Description
18861 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18862 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18863 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18866 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18867 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18869 \begin_inset space ~
18875 \begin_inset Newline newline
18879 \begin_inset Note Comment
18882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18883 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18892 \begin_layout Description
18894 \begin_inset space ~
18897 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18898 set in the document settings under
18900 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18902 \begin_inset space ~
18908 \begin_inset Newline newline
18912 \begin_inset Newline newline
18916 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18925 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18926 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18931 of a comment that appears in the output.
18937 \begin_inset Newline newline
18941 \begin_inset Newline newline
18944 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18947 \begin_layout Standard
18948 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18956 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18960 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18963 \begin_layout Section
18965 \begin_inset Index idx
18968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18975 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18977 name "sec:Footnotes"
18984 \begin_layout Standard
18986 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18989 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18992 or the toolbar button
18995 arg "footnote-insert"
19007 \begin_inset Graphics
19008 filename clipart/footnote.png
19017 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19018 's representation of your footnote.
19028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19047 label, the box will
19051 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
19052 Clicking on the box label again will close
19065 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
19066 and click on the footnote
19081 \begin_layout Standard
19082 Here is an example footnote:
19090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19091 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
19099 \begin_layout Standard
19100 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
19101 position where the footnote box is placed.
19102 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
19103 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
19104 according to the document class.
19106 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
19107 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19113 ey are described in the
19116 \begin_inset space ~
19124 \begin_layout Section
19126 \begin_inset Index idx
19129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19136 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19138 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19145 \begin_layout Standard
19146 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19148 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19150 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19152 \begin_inset space ~
19157 or the toolbar button
19160 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19186 appearing within your text.
19187 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19188 's representation of your margin
19197 \begin_layout Standard
19198 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19202 \begin_inset Marginal
19205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19207 This is a marginal note.
19215 \begin_layout Standard
19216 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19217 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19218 pages, right on odd pages.
19221 \begin_layout Standard
19222 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19225 \begin_inset space ~
19233 \begin_inset space ~
19241 \begin_layout Section
19242 Graphics and Images
19243 \begin_inset Index idx
19246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19253 \begin_inset Index idx
19256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19265 name "sec:Graphics"
19272 \begin_layout Standard
19273 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19274 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19277 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19282 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19286 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19289 \begin_layout Standard
19290 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19295 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19296 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19298 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19299 \begin_inset space ~
19303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19305 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19312 \begin_layout Standard
19317 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19318 of the image in the output.
19319 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19323 \begin_inset space ~
19327 \begin_inset space ~
19336 \begin_inset space ~
19340 \begin_inset space ~
19344 \begin_inset space ~
19349 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19350 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19358 \begin_layout Standard
19362 \begin_inset space ~
19366 \begin_inset space ~
19371 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19372 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19374 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19379 \begin_inset space ~
19384 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19385 with the image size is printed.
19388 \begin_layout Standard
19389 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19390 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19392 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19395 \begin_layout Standard
19397 \begin_inset Graphics
19398 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
19406 \begin_layout Standard
19407 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19408 the image into a float, see section
19409 \begin_inset space ~
19413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19415 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19422 \begin_layout Subsection
19424 \begin_inset Index idx
19427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19434 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19436 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19443 \begin_layout Standard
19444 You can insert images in any known file format.
19445 But as we explained in section
19446 \begin_inset space ~
19450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19452 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19456 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19458 therefore uses the program
19462 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19463 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19464 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19465 \begin_inset space ~
19469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19471 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19478 \begin_layout Standard
19479 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19482 \begin_layout Description
19484 \begin_inset space ~
19487 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19488 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19489 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19493 Graphics Interchange Format
19494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19497 (GIF, file extension
19498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19510 \begin_inset Index idx
19513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19545 Portable Network Graphics
19546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19549 (PNG, file extension
19550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19562 \begin_inset Index idx
19565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19597 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19601 (JPG, file extension
19602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19626 \begin_inset Index idx
19629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19660 \begin_layout Description
19662 \begin_inset space ~
19665 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19667 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19668 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19669 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19670 \begin_inset Newline newline
19673 Scalable image formats can be
19674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19677 Scalable Vector Graphics
19678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19681 (SVG, file extension
19682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19694 \begin_inset Index idx
19697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19729 Encapsulated PostScript
19730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19733 (EPS, file extension
19734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19746 \begin_inset Index idx
19749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19781 Portable Document Format
19782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19785 (PDF, file extension
19786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19798 \begin_inset Index idx
19801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19816 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19817 result will not be scalable.
19818 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19824 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19832 \begin_layout Standard
19833 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19840 \begin_layout Subsection
19841 Grouping of Image Settings
19842 \begin_inset Index idx
19845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19846 Images ! Settings grouping
19854 \begin_layout Standard
19855 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19857 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19858 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19860 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19861 need to manually change each of them.
19865 \begin_layout Standard
19866 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19869 \begin_inset space ~
19873 \begin_inset space ~
19885 \begin_inset space ~
19889 \begin_inset space ~
19895 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19896 and checking the name of the desired group.
19899 \begin_layout Section
19901 \begin_inset Index idx
19904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19911 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19920 \begin_layout Standard
19921 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19924 arg "tabular-insert"
19929 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19933 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19934 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19935 from the rest of the table.
19936 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19937 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19939 Here is an example table:
19942 \begin_layout Standard
19944 \begin_inset Tabular
19945 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19946 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19947 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19948 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19949 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19950 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20150 \begin_layout Subsection
20154 \begin_layout Standard
20155 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20158 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20162 This brings up the table dialog.
20163 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20164 cursor is placed currently.
20165 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20166 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20167 done on all of your selection.
20170 \begin_layout Standard
20171 In addition to the table dialog, the
20174 \begin_inset space ~
20179 helps you in setting table properties.
20180 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20183 \begin_layout Standard
20187 \begin_inset space ~
20192 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20193 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20194 current cell respectively.
20195 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20197 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20198 of text, see section
20199 \begin_inset space ~
20203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20205 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20212 \begin_layout Standard
20213 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20214 using the check box
20223 This will merge the cells to
20227 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20228 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20229 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20230 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20231 in the last row without the upper border:
20234 \begin_layout Standard
20236 \begin_inset Tabular
20237 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20238 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20239 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20240 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20241 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20242 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20253 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20262 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20338 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20373 \begin_layout Standard
20374 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20375 -arguments for the table.
20376 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20377 explained in the chapter
20384 \begin_inset space ~
20390 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20391 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20392 but are visible in the output.
20395 \begin_layout Standard
20396 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20404 Most DVI-viewers are
20408 able to display rotations.
20416 \begin_layout Standard
20421 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20426 adds lines for all cell borders.
20429 \begin_layout Subsection
20431 \begin_inset Index idx
20434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20435 Tables ! Multi-page
20441 \begin_inset Index idx
20444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20453 \begin_layout Standard
20454 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20457 \begin_inset space ~
20461 \begin_inset space ~
20469 \begin_inset space ~
20474 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20475 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20478 \begin_layout Description
20483 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20484 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20485 Except for the first page, if
20488 \begin_inset space ~
20496 \begin_layout Description
20500 \begin_inset space ~
20505 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20506 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20509 \begin_layout Description
20514 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20515 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20516 except for the last page, if
20519 \begin_inset space ~
20527 \begin_layout Description
20531 \begin_inset space ~
20536 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20537 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20540 \begin_layout Description
20541 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20542 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20544 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20548 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20551 \begin_inset space ~
20559 \begin_layout Standard
20560 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20561 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20562 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20568 In this context, first means first in this order:
20571 \begin_inset space ~
20583 \begin_inset space ~
20588 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20591 \begin_layout Standard
20593 \begin_inset Tabular
20594 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20595 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20596 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20597 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20598 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20599 <row endfirsthead="true">
20600 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20606 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20611 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20620 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20630 <row endfirsthead="true">
20631 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20642 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20651 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20663 <row endhead="true">
20664 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20675 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20684 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20694 <row endhead="true">
20695 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20706 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20715 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20727 <row endfoot="true">
20728 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20739 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20748 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20779 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21720 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21729 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21738 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21749 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21780 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21811 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21842 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21873 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21904 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21935 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21966 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21997 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22028 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22059 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22090 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22121 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22152 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22183 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22214 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22245 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22276 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22307 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22338 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22369 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22400 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22431 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22462 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22493 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22524 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22555 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22586 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22617 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22648 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22679 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22709 <row endlastfoot="true">
22710 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22721 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22730 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22747 \begin_layout Subsection
22749 \begin_inset Index idx
22752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22759 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22761 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22768 \begin_layout Standard
22769 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22770 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22771 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22772 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22776 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22779 \begin_layout Standard
22780 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22781 for the column in the table dialog.
22782 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22783 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22787 \begin_layout Standard
22789 \begin_inset Tabular
22790 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22791 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22792 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22793 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22794 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22814 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22883 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22939 This is longer now.
22944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22995 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22996 This is longer now.
23001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23027 \begin_layout Standard
23028 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
23029 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
23033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23034 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
23035 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
23041 Selection with the mouse or with
23045 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
23046 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
23047 the selection from outside the table.
23050 \begin_layout Section
23052 \begin_inset Index idx
23055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23062 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23071 \begin_layout Subsection
23075 \begin_layout Standard
23076 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
23077 have a fixed location.
23079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23086 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
23094 \begin_inset space ~
23099 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
23100 too many notes on the current page.
23103 \begin_layout Standard
23104 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
23105 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
23106 and pages without text.
23107 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
23108 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23109 Floats are therefore numbered.
23110 Referencing is described in section
23111 \begin_inset space ~
23115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23117 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23124 \begin_layout Standard
23125 To insert a float, use the menu
23127 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23131 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23132 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23134 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23135 \begin_inset Index idx
23138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23144 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23145 paragraph within the float.
23146 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23147 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23148 left-clicking on the box label.
23149 A closed float box looks like this:
23150 \begin_inset Graphics
23151 filename clipart/float.png
23156 – a gray button with a red label.
23159 \begin_layout Standard
23160 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23162 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23165 \begin_layout Subsection
23167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23169 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23174 \begin_inset Index idx
23177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23178 Floats ! Figure floats
23186 \begin_layout Standard
23188 \begin_inset space ~
23192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23194 reference "fig:A-star-in"
23198 was created using the menu
23200 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23201 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23207 arg "float-insert figure"
23211 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23214 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23220 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23224 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23225 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23227 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23229 \begin_inset space ~
23237 arg "layout-paragraph"
23243 \begin_layout Standard
23244 \begin_inset Float figure
23249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23251 \begin_inset Graphics
23252 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23262 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23265 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23267 name "fig:A-star-in"
23284 \begin_layout Standard
23285 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23286 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23288 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23297 ) and refer to it using the menu
23299 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23305 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23309 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23310 vague references like
23311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23318 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23319 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23329 For more about cross-references, see section
23330 \begin_inset space ~
23334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23336 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23343 \begin_layout Standard
23344 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23345 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23346 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23347 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23348 as described in section
23349 \begin_inset space ~
23353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23355 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23361 \begin_inset space ~
23365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23367 reference "fig:Two-images"
23371 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23372 You can also set the images one below the other.
23374 \begin_inset space ~
23378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23380 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23387 reference "fig:Star"
23391 are the subfigures.
23394 \begin_layout Standard
23395 \begin_inset Float figure
23400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23401 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23405 \begin_inset Float figure
23410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23411 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23414 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23416 name "fig:Undefinable"
23428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23429 \begin_inset Graphics
23430 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
23442 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23446 \begin_inset Float figure
23451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23452 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23455 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23470 \begin_inset Graphics
23471 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23483 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23490 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23493 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23495 name "fig:Two-images"
23512 \begin_layout Subsection
23514 \begin_inset Index idx
23517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23518 Floats ! Table floats
23526 \begin_layout Standard
23527 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23529 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23530 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23533 or the toolbar button
23536 arg "float-insert table"
23540 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23541 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23542 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23544 \begin_inset space ~
23548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23550 reference "tab:Table-float"
23557 \begin_layout Standard
23558 \begin_inset Float table
23563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23564 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23567 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23569 name "tab:Table-float"
23581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23583 \begin_inset Tabular
23584 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23585 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23586 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23587 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23588 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23715 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23736 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23739 \end{array}\right]$
23747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23760 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23781 \begin_layout Subsection
23783 \begin_inset Index idx
23786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23795 \begin_layout Standard
23797 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23798 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23799 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23801 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23809 \begin_inset space ~
23817 \begin_layout Section
23819 \begin_inset Index idx
23822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23831 \begin_layout Standard
23833 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23835 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23836 \begin_inset space \space{}
23843 \begin_layout Standard
23844 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23845 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23847 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23851 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23852 and its alignment within the page.
23855 \begin_layout Standard
23857 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23867 height_special "totalheight"
23872 backgroundcolor "none"
23875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23878 This is a minipage.
23879 The text is set in an italic style.
23882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23885 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23886 another formatting.
23894 \begin_layout Standard
23895 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23898 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23902 as described in section
23903 \begin_inset space ~
23907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23909 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23914 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23920 \begin_layout Standard
23921 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23931 height_special "totalheight"
23936 backgroundcolor "none"
23939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23940 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23941 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23947 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23951 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23961 height_special "totalheight"
23966 backgroundcolor "none"
23969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23970 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23971 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23979 \begin_layout Standard
23980 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23986 \begin_layout Standard
23987 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23989 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23996 \begin_inset space ~
24004 \begin_layout Chapter
24005 Mathematical Formulas
24006 \begin_inset Index idx
24009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24016 \begin_inset Index idx
24019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24048 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24050 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
24057 \begin_layout Standard
24058 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
24063 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
24066 \begin_layout Section
24068 \begin_inset Index idx
24071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24080 \begin_layout Standard
24081 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
24094 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
24096 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
24097 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
24098 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
24100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24106 \begin_layout Standard
24107 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24111 \begin_inset space ~
24116 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24119 \begin_layout Standard
24120 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24121 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24124 \begin_layout Standard
24125 This is a line with an inline formula
24126 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24132 \begin_layout Standard
24133 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24134 paragraph, like this one:
24135 \begin_inset Formula
24142 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24145 \begin_layout Standard
24147 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24149 For example, typing
24150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24163 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24164 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24168 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24171 \begin_inset space ~
24179 \begin_layout Subsection
24180 Navigating in Formulas
24181 \begin_inset Index idx
24184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24193 \begin_layout Standard
24194 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24195 achieved with the arrow keys.
24197 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24198 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24203 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24204 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24208 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24212 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24215 \end{array}\right]$
24223 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24228 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24229 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24232 \begin_layout Standard
24237 , printed in this document as
24238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24242 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24249 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24250 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24251 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24256 For example, if you want
24257 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24265 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24275 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24279 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24284 , since in the latter case only the
24287 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24292 will be under the square root sign:
24293 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24299 \begin_layout Standard
24300 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24302 \begin_inset Formula
24304 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24313 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24314 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24317 \begin_layout Subsection
24321 \begin_layout Standard
24322 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24323 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24327 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24328 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24329 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24330 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24331 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24335 \begin_layout Subsection
24336 Exponents and Subscripts
24337 \begin_inset Index idx
24340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24347 \begin_inset Index idx
24350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24359 \begin_layout Standard
24360 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24363 arg "math-superscript"
24369 arg "math-subscript"
24372 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24374 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24377 , type in a formula
24380 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24390 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24396 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24400 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24406 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24412 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24421 , you have to use an extra
24425 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24426 For example, if you want
24427 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24433 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24439 Subscripts are similar: To get
24440 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24446 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24454 \begin_layout Subsection
24456 \begin_inset Index idx
24459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24468 \begin_layout Standard
24469 Create a fraction either with the command
24475 or by using the icon
24478 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24484 \begin_inset space ~
24490 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24491 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24492 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24497 To move back up, press
24502 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24503 \begin_inset Formula
24505 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24508 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24516 \begin_layout Subsection
24518 \begin_inset Index idx
24521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24530 \begin_layout Standard
24531 Roots can be created using the
24534 \begin_inset space ~
24542 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24548 arg "math-insert \\root"
24570 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24576 always produces a square root.
24579 \begin_layout Subsection
24580 Operators with Limits
24581 \begin_inset Index idx
24584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24591 \begin_inset Index idx
24594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24603 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24610 \begin_layout Standard
24612 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24616 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24619 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24620 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24621 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24622 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24623 The sum operator will automatically place its
24624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24631 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24633 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24637 \begin_inset Formula
24639 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24644 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24648 \begin_layout Standard
24649 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24651 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24652 behind the operator and using the menu
24654 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24655 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24657 \begin_inset space ~
24661 \begin_inset space ~
24675 \begin_layout Standard
24676 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24685 \begin_inset Index idx
24688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24695 \begin_inset Formula
24697 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24702 which will place the
24703 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24715 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24716 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24722 \begin_layout Standard
24723 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24730 Have a look at section
24731 \begin_inset space ~
24735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24737 reference "subsec:Functions"
24741 for an explanation of function macros.
24744 \begin_layout Subsection
24746 \begin_inset Index idx
24749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24758 \begin_layout Standard
24759 Most math symbols can be found in the
24762 \begin_inset space ~
24767 under one of several categories; including
24784 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24788 \begin_layout Standard
24789 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24790 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24791 don't have to use the
24794 \begin_inset space ~
24799 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24801 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24804 \begin_layout Subsection
24806 \begin_inset Index idx
24809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24818 \begin_layout Standard
24819 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24825 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24831 \begin_inset space ~
24839 arg "math-insert \\space"
24843 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24844 For example, the sequence
24849 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24852 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24854 \begin_inset Graphics
24855 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24860 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24861 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24862 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24863 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24864 , because they are negative
24866 Here are two examples:
24869 \begin_layout Standard
24879 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24885 \begin_layout Standard
24895 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24901 \begin_layout Subsection
24903 \begin_inset Index idx
24906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24913 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24915 name "subsec:Functions"
24922 \begin_layout Standard
24926 \begin_inset space ~
24931 contains under the button
24934 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24937 a number of function macros, such as
24938 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24942 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24950 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24957 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24958 avoid confusions, because
24959 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24963 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24969 \begin_layout Standard
24970 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24972 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24976 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24982 \begin_layout Standard
24983 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24984 are placed, as described in section
24985 \begin_inset space ~
24989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24991 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24998 \begin_layout Subsection
25000 \begin_inset Index idx
25003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25012 \begin_layout Standard
25013 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
25015 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
25016 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
25017 commands, for example, to enter
25018 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25021 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
25022 Our example is entered by typing
25027 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25034 \begin_inset space ~
25038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25040 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
25044 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
25047 \begin_layout Standard
25048 \begin_inset Float table
25053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25054 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25057 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25059 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
25063 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
25071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25073 \begin_inset Tabular
25074 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
25075 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25076 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25077 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25078 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25162 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25216 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25270 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25324 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25378 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25432 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25486 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25540 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25594 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25639 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25660 \begin_layout Standard
25661 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25664 \begin_inset space ~
25672 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25675 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25679 \begin_layout Section
25680 Brackets and Delimiters
25681 \begin_inset Index idx
25684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25691 \begin_inset Index idx
25694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25701 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25703 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25710 \begin_layout Standard
25711 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25713 For some purposes, using just the keys
25718 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25719 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25720 toolbar delimiter icon
25723 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25727 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25728 \begin_inset Formula
25730 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25738 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25739 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25743 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25746 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25752 \begin_inset Formula
25754 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25762 \begin_layout Standard
25763 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25764 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25768 \begin_layout Standard
25769 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25770 left side and right side.
25771 If you use the option
25774 \begin_inset space ~
25779 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25780 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25782 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25787 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25788 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25791 \begin_layout Standard
25792 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25793 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25794 is to go inside the brackets.
25795 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25800 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25801 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25802 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25806 arg "math-delim ( )"
25812 \begin_layout Section
25813 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25814 \begin_inset Index idx
25817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25824 \begin_inset Index idx
25827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25834 \begin_inset Index idx
25837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25838 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25846 \begin_layout Standard
25847 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25851 \begin_inset space ~
25859 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25863 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25864 Here is an example:
25865 \begin_inset Formula
25867 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25876 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25877 \begin_inset space ~
25881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25883 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25888 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25889 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25890 This alignment is set in the box
25895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25944 for every column as default.
25945 For example, the sequence
25946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25957 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25958 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25959 corresponds to the relevant column.
25960 The result will look like this:
25961 \begin_inset Formula
25964 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25965 column & has & has\,right\\
25966 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25975 \begin_layout Standard
25976 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25979 arg "newline-insert newline"
25982 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25983 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25985 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25988 or the math toolbar.
25991 \begin_layout Standard
25992 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25993 It can be created with the menu
25995 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25996 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25998 \begin_inset space ~
26010 Here is an example:
26011 \begin_inset Formula
26025 \begin_layout Standard
26026 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26029 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
26032 arg "newline-insert newline"
26036 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
26041 arg "newline-insert newline"
26044 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
26045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26052 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
26053 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
26054 A new row is created by every further entry of
26057 arg "newline-insert newline"
26061 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
26062 Here is an example:
26063 \begin_inset Formula
26065 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
26066 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
26071 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
26072 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
26073 \begin_inset Formula
26075 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
26083 \begin_layout Standard
26084 The multi-line formula type described here is called
26091 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
26092 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
26093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26095 reference "eq:asquared"
26100 The other types are described in section
26101 \begin_inset space ~
26105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26107 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26114 \begin_layout Section
26115 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26116 \begin_inset Index idx
26119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26120 Math ! Formula numbering
26126 \begin_inset Index idx
26129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26130 Math ! Referencing formulas
26136 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26138 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26145 \begin_layout Standard
26146 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26148 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26149 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26151 \begin_inset space ~
26155 \begin_inset space ~
26163 arg "math-number-toggle"
26167 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26168 within parentheses.
26169 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26170 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26171 the document class.
26172 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26173 separated by a dot:
26174 \begin_inset Formula
26184 arg "math-number-toggle"
26187 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26188 You can only number displayed formulas.
26191 \begin_layout Standard
26192 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26194 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26195 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26197 \begin_inset space ~
26201 \begin_inset space ~
26209 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26212 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26213 \begin_inset Formula
26216 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26222 To number all lines use the shortcut
26225 arg "math-number-toggle"
26231 \begin_layout Standard
26232 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26235 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26236 A label is inserted with the menu
26238 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26247 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26248 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26249 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26261 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26262 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26263 We inserted in the following example the label
26264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26271 in the second line:
26272 \begin_inset Formula
26274 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26275 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26280 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26281 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26282 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26284 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26286 \begin_inset space ~
26294 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26298 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26299 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26300 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26301 as the formula number:
26304 \begin_layout Standard
26305 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26308 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26315 \begin_layout Standard
26316 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26317 's cross-reference box are described in section
26318 \begin_inset space ~
26322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26324 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26329 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26337 \begin_layout Section
26338 User defined math macros
26339 \begin_inset Index idx
26342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26351 \begin_layout Standard
26353 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26354 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26355 Math macros are explained in section
26358 \begin_inset space ~
26370 \begin_layout Section
26374 \begin_layout Subsection
26376 \begin_inset Index idx
26379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26388 \begin_layout Standard
26389 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26390 To set a font in a formula, use the
26393 \begin_inset space ~
26401 arg "math-insert \\font"
26404 , or enter its command, listed in table
26405 \begin_inset space ~
26409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26411 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26418 \begin_layout Standard
26419 \begin_inset Float table
26424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26425 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26430 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26434 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26444 \begin_inset Tabular
26445 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26446 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26447 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26448 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26480 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26507 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26534 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26567 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26594 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26621 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26655 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26682 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26716 \begin_layout Standard
26717 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26725 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26741 \begin_layout Standard
26742 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26743 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26748 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26749 space when you need a space in the box.
26750 Here is an example where
26751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26762 denotes the set of numbers:
26763 \begin_inset Formula
26765 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26773 \begin_layout Standard
26774 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26775 You can, for example, put a character in
26784 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26788 \begin_inset Newline newline
26791 So it is better not to use this feature.
26794 \begin_layout Standard
26795 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26796 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26800 \begin_inset Newline newline
26803 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26809 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26810 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26816 \begin_layout Standard
26823 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26826 \begin_layout Standard
26827 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26829 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26830 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26832 \begin_inset space ~
26840 \begin_layout Subsection
26842 \begin_inset Index idx
26845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26854 \begin_layout Standard
26855 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26857 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26861 \begin_inset space ~
26865 \begin_inset space ~
26873 \begin_inset space ~
26881 arg "math-insert \\font"
26885 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26886 in black instead of blue.
26887 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26888 Here is an example:
26889 \begin_inset Formula
26892 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26893 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26902 \begin_layout Subsection
26904 \begin_inset Index idx
26907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26916 \begin_layout Standard
26917 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26918 automatically chosen in most situations.
26936 For most characters,
26944 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26945 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26950 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26951 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26952 thinks are appropriate.
26953 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26956 arg "math-insert \\style"
26960 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26961 For example, you can set
26962 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26965 , which is normally in
26974 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26978 The four styles are used in the following example:
26981 \begin_layout Standard
26982 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26986 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26990 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26994 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
27000 \begin_layout Standard
27001 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
27002 is set in a particular size with the menu
27004 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27006 \begin_inset space ~
27011 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
27012 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
27013 will be adjusted to correspond.
27014 As an example here is a formula in the font size
27015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27025 \begin_layout Standard
27029 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
27035 \begin_layout Section
27036 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27038 \begin_inset Index idx
27041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27048 \begin_inset Index idx
27051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27060 \begin_layout Standard
27062 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
27063 that are in common use.
27066 \begin_layout Subsection
27067 Enabling AMS-Support
27070 \begin_layout Standard
27071 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
27072 the document by selecting the checkbox
27075 \begin_inset space ~
27079 \begin_inset space ~
27083 \begin_inset space ~
27090 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27094 \begin_inset Index idx
27097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27098 Document ! Settings
27106 \begin_inset space ~
27112 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27113 -errors in formulas,
27114 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27117 \begin_layout Subsection
27119 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27121 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27126 \begin_inset Index idx
27129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27130 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27138 \begin_layout Standard
27139 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27140 provides a selection of different formula types.
27142 allows you to choose between
27163 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27164 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27171 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27174 \begin_layout Chapter
27178 \begin_layout Section
27180 \begin_inset Index idx
27183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27190 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27192 name "sec:Cross-References"
27199 \begin_layout Standard
27200 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27201 's strengths is cross-references.
27202 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27204 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27205 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27206 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27209 \begin_layout Enumerate
27213 \begin_layout Enumerate
27214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27216 name "enu:Second-item"
27223 \begin_layout Enumerate
27227 \begin_layout Standard
27228 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27230 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27233 or by pressing the toolbar button
27240 A gray label box like this:
27241 \begin_inset Graphics
27242 filename clipart/label.png
27246 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27248 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27283 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27284 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27300 \begin_layout Standard
27301 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27303 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27306 or the toolbar button
27309 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27313 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27314 \begin_inset Graphics
27315 filename clipart/reference.png
27319 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27321 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27334 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27338 \begin_layout Standard
27339 As an alternative to
27341 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27344 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27349 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27350 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27352 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27364 \begin_layout Standard
27365 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27366 \begin_inset space ~
27370 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27372 reference "enu:Second-item"
27379 \begin_layout Standard
27380 It is recommended to use a protected space
27384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27385 described in section
27386 \begin_inset space ~
27390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27392 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27401 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27402 line breaks between them.
27405 \begin_layout Standard
27406 There are eight formats of cross-references:
27409 \begin_layout Description
27410 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27413 reference "fig:Two-images"
27420 \begin_layout Description
27421 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27422 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27434 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27441 \begin_layout Description
27442 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27443 \begin_inset space ~
27447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27448 LatexCommand pageref
27449 reference "fig:Two-images"
27456 \begin_layout Description
27458 \begin_inset space ~
27462 \begin_inset space ~
27465 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27467 LatexCommand vpageref
27468 reference "fig:Two-images"
27473 \begin_inset Newline newline
27476 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27477 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27478 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27479 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27480 it prints “on the next page”.
27481 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27484 \begin_layout Description
27486 \begin_inset space ~
27490 \begin_inset space ~
27494 \begin_inset space ~
27497 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27500 reference "fig:Two-images"
27505 \begin_inset Newline newline
27508 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27514 ; otherwise it behaves like
27518 \begin_inset space ~
27522 \begin_inset space ~
27531 \begin_layout Description
27533 \begin_inset space ~
27536 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27537 \begin_inset Newline newline
27541 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27549 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27559 \begin_inset Index idx
27562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27564 packages ! prettyref
27570 \begin_inset Index idx
27573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27575 packages ! refstyle
27586 \begin_inset Newline newline
27589 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27590 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27593 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27597 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27598 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27606 is the default and preferred because
27610 supports only English documents.
27611 The format is specified by using the command
27623 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27624 preamble of the document.
27625 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27643 \begin_inset Newline newline
27650 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27655 \begin_inset Newline newline
27666 predefines reference formats for all available types.
27667 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27669 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27670 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27675 , you might do so as follows:
27676 \begin_inset Newline newline
27683 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27688 \begin_inset Newline newline
27691 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
27692 the package documentation
27693 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27695 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27701 \begin_inset Newline newline
27712 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
27719 \begin_layout Description
27721 \begin_inset space ~
27724 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27726 LatexCommand nameref
27727 reference "fig:Two-images"
27734 \begin_layout Description
27736 \begin_inset space ~
27739 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27740 label for the reference:
27741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27742 LatexCommand labelonly
27743 reference "fig:Two-images"
27748 \begin_inset Newline newline
27751 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
27752 Code, if you want to issue a command
27753 that \SpecialChar LyX
27759 , then you may want to use the
27762 \begin_inset space ~
27767 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27777 This is the form needed for e.
27778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27782 \begin_inset space \space{}
27789 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
27790 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27792 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27796 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27800 \begin_layout Standard
27801 You can only use the style
27805 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27809 is always possible.
27812 \begin_layout Standard
27813 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27814 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27816 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27817 \begin_inset space ~
27821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27823 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27830 \begin_layout Standard
27831 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27835 \begin_inset space ~
27839 \begin_inset space ~
27844 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27845 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27848 \begin_inset space ~
27853 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27854 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27857 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27863 \begin_layout Standard
27864 You can change labels at any time.
27865 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27866 do not need to think about this.
27869 \begin_layout Standard
27870 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27872 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27876 \begin_layout Standard
27877 References are described in detail in the section
27878 \begin_inset space ~
27888 \begin_inset space ~
27896 \begin_layout Section
27897 Table of Contents and other Listings
27898 \begin_inset Index idx
27901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27908 \begin_inset Index idx
27911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27912 Navigating ! Outline
27918 \begin_inset Index idx
27921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27928 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27937 \begin_layout Subsection
27939 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27941 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27948 \begin_layout Standard
27949 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27951 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27952 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27954 \begin_inset space ~
27958 \begin_inset space ~
27964 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27966 If you click on it, the
27970 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27971 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27972 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27974 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27976 \begin_inset space ~
27981 that is described in section
27982 \begin_inset space ~
27986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27988 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27995 \begin_layout Standard
27996 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27997 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27999 \begin_inset space ~
28003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28005 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
28009 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
28011 \begin_inset space ~
28015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28017 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
28021 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
28023 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
28026 \begin_layout Subsection
28027 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
28028 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28030 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
28037 \begin_layout Standard
28038 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
28040 You can insert them via the
28042 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28046 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
28049 \begin_layout Section
28050 URLs and Hyperlinks
28051 \begin_inset Index idx
28054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28061 \begin_inset Index idx
28064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28073 \begin_layout Subsection
28075 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28084 \begin_layout Standard
28085 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
28087 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28093 \begin_layout Standard
28094 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28096 \begin_inset Flex URL
28099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28109 \begin_layout Standard
28110 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28116 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28120 \begin_layout Standard
28121 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28129 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28138 \begin_layout Subsection
28140 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28142 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28149 \begin_layout Standard
28150 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28152 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28155 or with the toolbar button
28162 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28171 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28172 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28173 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28175 name "LyX's homepage"
28176 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28181 , an Email address like this:
28182 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28184 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28185 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28191 , or a link to a file.
28196 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
28204 \begin_layout Standard
28205 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28218 to the link target.
28221 \begin_layout Standard
28222 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28223 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28224 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28225 the text style dialog.
28226 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28230 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28232 name "LyX's homepage"
28233 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28241 \begin_layout Standard
28242 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28246 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28248 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28249 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28253 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28255 \begin_inset Newline newline
28263 \begin_inset Newline newline
28270 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28273 \begin_layout Section
28275 \begin_inset Index idx
28278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28285 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28287 name "sec:Appendices"
28294 \begin_layout Standard
28295 Appendices are created with the menu
28297 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28299 \begin_inset space ~
28303 \begin_inset space ~
28309 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28310 as the appendix part of the book.
28311 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28314 \begin_layout Standard
28315 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28316 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28317 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28318 and the subsection number.
28319 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28323 \begin_layout Standard
28325 \begin_inset space ~
28329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28331 reference "chap:Credits"
28336 \begin_inset space ~
28340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28342 reference "subsec:Export"
28349 \begin_layout Section
28351 \begin_inset Index idx
28354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28363 name "sec:Bibliography"
28370 \begin_layout Standard
28371 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28373 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
28374 \begin_inset space ~
28378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28380 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28387 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28392 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
28393 \begin_inset space ~
28397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28399 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28404 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28405 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
28406 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
28410 using a bibliography database.
28413 \begin_layout Standard
28414 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28415 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28419 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28420 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28421 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28422 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28423 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28426 \begin_layout Subsection
28427 The Bibliography Environment
28428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28430 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28437 \begin_layout Standard
28442 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28444 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28453 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28455 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28456 of ASCII characters only.
28460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28462 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28465 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
28471 \begin_inset Newline newline
28475 \begin_inset Flex URL
28478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28480 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
28492 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28502 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28503 \begin_inset Newline newline
28510 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
28511 the number of the entry.
28516 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
28525 \begin_layout Standard
28526 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28528 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28531 or the toolbar button
28534 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28538 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28539 containing the available citations.
28540 Select one or more keys from the list and
28550 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28551 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28555 \begin_layout Standard
28556 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
28557 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
28558 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28570 \begin_layout Standard
28574 Companion Second Edition
28577 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28579 key "latexcompanion"
28587 \begin_layout Standard
28588 The \SpecialChar LyX
28589 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28590 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28600 \begin_layout Standard
28601 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28608 \begin_inset Index idx
28611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28619 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28631 Author A and Author B(Year)
28632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28639 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28641 Then, if you select
28644 \begin_inset space ~
28649 in the document settings
28650 \begin_inset Index idx
28653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28654 Document ! Settings
28661 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28663 \begin_inset space ~
28669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28671 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28678 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28681 \begin_layout Standard
28682 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28685 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28687 \begin_inset space ~
28695 arg "layout-paragraph"
28699 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28702 \begin_layout Subsection
28703 Bibliography databases
28704 \begin_inset Index idx
28707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28708 Bibliography ! Databases
28714 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28716 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28723 \begin_layout Standard
28724 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
28729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28730 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28732 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28733 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28738 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28740 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28741 your working field in a database.
28742 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28743 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28744 list for that document.
28745 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28749 \begin_layout Standard
28750 The database is a text file with the file extension
28751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28762 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28763 The format is explained in
28764 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28771 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28773 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28775 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28781 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28782 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28783 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28785 \begin_inset Flex URL
28788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28790 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28798 \begin_layout Standard
28800 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28801 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28802 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28804 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
28806 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
28807 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
28808 Those are addressed by
28813 \begin_inset Index idx
28816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28818 packages ! biblatex
28824 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28825 (although it has been significantly
28826 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28836 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28837 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28838 might conversely fail to correctly
28839 handle databases that use specific
28848 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28852 \begin_layout Standard
28853 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28858 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
28860 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28864 \begin_inset Index idx
28867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28868 Document ! Settings
28880 \begin_inset space ~
28885 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28893 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28894 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28896 \begin_inset Index idx
28899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28900 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28909 \begin_layout Standard
28910 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28913 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28918 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28920 \begin_inset space ~
28926 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
28927 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28935 Add bibliography to TOC
28937 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28942 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28943 in the document or just the cited references.
28946 \begin_layout Standard
28947 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28948 style file is a text file with the file extension
28949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28960 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28961 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28962 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28963 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28965 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
28970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28971 For information on how this is done, have a look at
28972 \begin_inset Newline newline
28976 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28978 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
28988 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28993 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
28997 \begin_layout Standard
28998 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
29001 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29003 \begin_inset Index idx
29006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29007 Bibliography ! Biblatex
29013 \begin_inset Index idx
29016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29018 packages ! biblatex
29026 \begin_layout Standard
29027 Accessing a database via
29031 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29034 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29039 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29041 \begin_inset space ~
29047 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29048 you cannot select a
29053 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29057 \begin_layout Standard
29062 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
29064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29075 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
29076 file (text file with the file extension
29077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29088 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
29089 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
29091 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
29095 \begin_layout Standard
29100 styles are not set in the
29103 \begin_inset space ~
29108 dialog, but in the document settings.
29109 \begin_inset Index idx
29112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29113 Document ! Settings
29118 However, in the dialog in the
29122 field, which is only visible if you use
29126 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
29127 example how its heading will appear).
29128 These options are deescribed in detail in the
29133 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29143 \begin_layout Standard
29144 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29145 \begin_inset space ~
29149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29151 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29161 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29162 Bibliography Processors
29165 \begin_layout Standard
29166 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29167 uses a bibliography processor,
29168 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
29169 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
29170 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29172 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
29173 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
29176 \begin_layout Standard
29177 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
29179 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29180 You can do this on a general level in
29182 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29183 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29184 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29187 or for individual documents in
29189 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29190 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29194 The following variants are available by default:
29197 \begin_layout Description
29198 biber a specific, modern processor
29199 \begin_inset Index idx
29202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29209 developed exclusively for
29213 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29219 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
29224 makes use of; if you use the
29228 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29235 \begin_layout Description
29236 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29237 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29238 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
29242 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
29245 \begin_layout Description
29246 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29247 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
29251 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
29255 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29259 features are supported.
29262 \begin_layout Standard
29263 By default (with the
29269 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29270 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29283 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29284 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29285 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29288 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29289 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
29302 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29303 -based bibliography styles).
29304 This should suit most needs.
29307 \begin_layout Standard
29308 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29309 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
29310 (in \SpecialChar LyX
29315 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29316 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29317 You can adjust it in
29319 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29320 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29321 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29327 \begin_layout Standard
29328 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
29329 can add below the selection.
29330 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29331 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29337 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29347 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29351 \begin_layout Standard
29353 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29355 These are explained in detail in section
29357 Customizing Bibliographies
29361 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29366 Additional Features
29371 \begin_layout Subsection
29373 \begin_inset Index idx
29376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29377 Bibliography ! Citation format
29383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29385 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29392 \begin_layout Standard
29393 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29394 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29398 \begin_inset space \space{}
29401 numerical citation (as
29402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29409 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
29410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29417 ) or author-year citations (as
29418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29427 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29431 \begin_layout Standard
29432 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
29435 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29436 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29440 \begin_inset Index idx
29443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29444 Document ! Settings
29449 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
29455 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29456 labels, is there to use
29459 \begin_inset space ~
29470 \begin_inset space ~
29475 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29478 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29485 \begin_layout Standard
29486 With a bibliography database (see
29487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29489 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29496 ) one has in contrary to the
29500 environment full access to the formatting styles.
29501 These style formats are available:
29504 \begin_layout Description
29506 \begin_inset space ~
29509 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29510 -based approached without any additional packages
29511 (simple numeric citations).
29514 \begin_layout Description
29515 Biblatex loads the package
29520 \begin_inset Index idx
29523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29525 packages ! biblatex
29530 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
29532 Biblatex citation style
29536 Biblatex bibliography style
29539 Options to the package
29543 can be entered in the
29550 \begin_layout Description
29552 \begin_inset space ~
29556 \begin_inset space ~
29559 mode) loads the package
29563 with the natbib compatibility mode.
29564 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
29576 behavior very closely.
29581 this option has some additional styles.
29586 styles are also supported by this variant.
29589 \begin_layout Description
29591 \begin_inset space ~
29594 (BibTeX) loads the package
29599 \begin_inset Index idx
29602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29609 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29612 \begin_layout Description
29614 \begin_inset space ~
29617 (BibTeX) loads the package
29622 \begin_inset Index idx
29625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29632 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
29635 \begin_layout Standard
29644 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29646 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
29655 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29657 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29658 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
29660 Biblatex citation style
29663 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
29669 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29673 \begin_layout Standard
29674 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29675 are available in the
29680 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
29681 a name prefix such as
29682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29697 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29698 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29702 \begin_inset space \space{}
29706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29717 \begin_layout Standard
29718 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
29720 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29724 \begin_inset space \space{}
29727 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
29729 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29733 \begin_inset space \space{}
29737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29749 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29753 \begin_inset space ~
29761 \begin_inset space ~
29767 Here is a simple example where the text
29768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29772 \begin_inset space ~
29776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29779 appears after the reference:
29782 \begin_layout Quote
29784 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29787 key "latexcompanion"
29795 \begin_layout Standard
29796 All styles except for
29800 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
29802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29810 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
29814 \begin_layout Standard
29815 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
29816 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
29817 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
29822 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
29823 multi-citation (so-called
29824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29827 qualified citation lists
29828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29834 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
29839 dialog will display three columns in the field
29846 \begin_inset space ~
29854 \begin_inset space ~
29862 \begin_inset space ~
29868 If you double-click on an item's
29871 \begin_inset space ~
29879 \begin_inset space ~
29884 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
29887 General text before
29893 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
29896 \begin_layout Section
29898 \begin_inset Index idx
29901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29908 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29917 \begin_layout Standard
29918 An index entry is created if you use the menu
29920 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29922 \begin_inset space ~
29927 or the toolbar button
29934 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
29935 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
29936 by \SpecialChar LyX
29937 as the index entry.
29940 \begin_layout Standard
29941 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
29943 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29944 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29946 \begin_inset space ~
29952 A light blue box labeled
29953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29964 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
29965 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
29969 \begin_layout Standard
29970 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
29971 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
29972 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
29973 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29975 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29977 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
29985 \begin_layout Subsection
29986 Grouping Index Entries
29987 \begin_inset Index idx
29990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29999 \begin_layout Standard
30000 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
30002 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
30003 lists under the entry
30004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30012 First we create the entry
30013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30021 \begin_inset space ~
30025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30027 reference "subsec:Lists"
30032 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
30033 \begin_inset space ~
30037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30039 reference "sec:Itemize"
30043 , we insert the command
30046 \begin_layout Standard
30052 \begin_layout Standard
30056 \begin_layout Standard
30062 \begin_layout Standard
30063 for the enumerated list in section
30064 \begin_inset space ~
30068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30070 reference "sec:Enumerate"
30077 \begin_layout Standard
30078 The exclamation mark
30079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30086 marks the grouping levels.
30087 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
30088 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
30089 If we don't have an index entry for
30090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30097 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
30100 \begin_layout Subsection
30102 \begin_inset Index idx
30105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30106 Index ! Page ranges
30114 \begin_layout Standard
30115 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
30117 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
30118 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
30119 an index entry in section
30120 \begin_inset space ~
30124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30126 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
30133 \begin_layout Standard
30136 Paragraph environments|(
30139 \begin_layout Standard
30140 and another entry at the end of section
30141 \begin_inset space ~
30145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30147 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30154 \begin_layout Standard
30157 Paragraph environments|)
30160 \begin_layout Standard
30162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30185 respectively start and end the index range.
30186 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30187 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30188 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30189 An example is the index entry
30190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30193 Document ! Settings
30194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30200 \begin_layout Subsection
30202 \begin_inset Index idx
30205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30206 Index ! Cross referencing
30214 \begin_layout Standard
30215 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30216 We referred for example in the index entry
30217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30225 \begin_inset space ~
30229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30231 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30235 ) to the index entry
30236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30243 in the same section using the entry
30246 \begin_layout Standard
30249 GIF|see{Image formats}
30252 \begin_layout Standard
30253 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30255 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30256 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30259 \begin_layout Subsection
30261 \begin_inset Index idx
30264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30265 Index ! Entry order
30273 \begin_layout Standard
30274 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30275 follow the rules for the index order.
30276 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30282 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30284 \begin_inset space ~
30288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30290 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30299 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30300 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30325 \begin_inset Index idx
30328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30329 Dummy entries ! maïs
30335 \begin_inset Index idx
30338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30339 Dummy entries ! maître
30345 \begin_inset Index idx
30348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30349 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30354 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30355 maïs, maison, maître.
30356 To achieve this, we use the command
30359 \begin_layout Standard
30362 previous entry@current entry
30365 \begin_layout Standard
30366 In our case we want to have
30367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30382 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30385 \begin_layout Standard
30391 \begin_layout Standard
30392 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30393 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30395 See the next subsection for an example.
30398 \begin_layout Subsection
30400 \begin_inset Index idx
30403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30404 Index ! Entry layout
30412 \begin_layout Standard
30413 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30414 \begin_inset Index idx
30417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30420 This is an italic dummy entry
30425 You can also format the page number using the character
30426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30433 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30434 -command without a backslash.
30435 We can write for example
30438 \begin_layout Standard
30441 italic page number:|textit
30444 \begin_layout Standard
30445 to get the page number in italic.
30446 \begin_inset Index idx
30449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30450 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30455 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30456 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30474 \begin_inset space ~
30480 Have a look at section
30481 \begin_inset space ~
30485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30487 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30491 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30495 \begin_layout Standard
30496 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30504 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30508 to generate the index, see section
30509 \begin_inset space ~
30513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30515 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30524 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30529 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30530 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30533 key "latexcompanion"
30546 \begin_layout Standard
30547 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30549 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30550 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30551 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30552 If so, put the following in the preamble
30555 \begin_layout Standard
30567 \begin_layout Standard
30571 \begin_layout Standard
30577 \begin_layout Standard
30578 in the index entry.
30579 \begin_inset Index idx
30582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30583 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30588 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30589 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30590 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30593 \begin_layout Standard
30594 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30595 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30596 a bold font for all index entries.
30597 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30609 documentation for details,
30610 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30612 key "makeindex,xindy"
30620 \begin_layout Subsection
30622 \begin_inset Index idx
30625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30632 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30634 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30641 \begin_layout Standard
30642 If the index generation program
30646 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30647 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30651 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30652 distribution, is used.
30656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30661 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
30662 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
30663 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
30664 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
30665 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
30675 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
30677 dialog, see section
30678 \begin_inset space ~
30682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30684 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30689 The available options are listed and explained in
30690 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30692 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
30698 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
30702 \begin_layout Standard
30703 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
30704 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
30707 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30708 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30712 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
30713 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
30716 \begin_layout Subsection
30720 \begin_layout Standard
30721 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
30722 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
30723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30730 next to the standard index.
30732 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
30733 that add this feature.
30740 \begin_inset Index idx
30743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30745 packages ! splitidx
30750 package to generate multiple indexes.
30751 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
30756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30757 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
30759 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30767 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30768 style, but it also includes
30769 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
30770 Please consult the package's manual for details.
30778 \begin_layout Standard
30779 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
30780 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
30782 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30783 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30786 and select the option
30788 Use multiple Indexes
30795 already contains the standard index
30796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30804 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
30805 also appear as a heading) to the
30809 input field and press the
30814 The new index now also appears in the list.
30815 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
30816 label color to the new index.
30819 \begin_layout Standard
30820 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
30823 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30830 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
30831 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
30832 are additional features:
30835 \begin_layout Itemize
30836 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
30837 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
30840 \begin_layout Itemize
30841 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
30842 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
30847 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
30848 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
30849 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
30850 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
30853 \begin_layout Itemize
30858 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
30859 code in the name of the index.
30862 \begin_layout Section
30863 Nomenclature/Glossary
30864 \begin_inset Index idx
30867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30874 \begin_inset Index idx
30877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30906 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30908 name "sec:Nomenclature"
30915 \begin_layout Standard
30916 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
30917 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
30918 called nomenclature or glossary.
30921 \begin_layout Standard
30922 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30929 \begin_inset Index idx
30932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30940 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
30942 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30949 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30953 \begin_layout Standard
30954 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
30955 and then use the menu
30957 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30963 \begin_inset space ~
30968 or the toolbar button
30971 arg "nomencl-insert"
30976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30987 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
30990 \begin_layout Standard
30991 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
30992 The first is the term or
30996 that you wish to define.
31001 of the term or symbol.
31004 \begin_layout Standard
31005 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31013 To use \SpecialChar TeX
31014 code for nomenclature entries the option
31018 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
31026 \begin_layout Subsection
31027 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
31028 \begin_inset Index idx
31031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31032 Nomenclature ! Layout
31040 \begin_layout Standard
31041 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
31045 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
31048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31052 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31060 \begin_inset Newline newline
31068 \begin_inset Newline newline
31074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31081 character starts/ends the formula.
31082 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31083 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31095 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31105 \begin_layout Standard
31106 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31107 syntax is given in section
31108 \begin_inset space ~
31112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31114 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31121 \begin_layout Standard
31125 \begin_inset space ~
31130 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31132 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31137 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31144 in this document is:
31145 \begin_inset Newline newline
31150 dummy entry for the character
31155 \begin_inset Newline newline
31167 \begin_inset space ~
31177 font use the command
31206 \begin_layout Standard
31207 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31208 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31212 \begin_inset space \space{}
31216 \begin_inset Newline newline
31232 \begin_inset Newline newline
31235 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31236 This command will make the font of all symbols
31243 \begin_inset space ~
31251 \begin_layout Standard
31252 If the characters |
31253 \begin_inset space \space{}
31257 \begin_inset space \space{}
31261 \begin_inset space \space{}
31265 \begin_inset space \space{}
31269 \begin_inset space \space{}
31272 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
31273 a quote character in front of them.
31274 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31275 LatexCommand nomenclature
31276 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31277 description "The quote sign is output by writing ' \"\" '"
31283 \begin_inset Note Note
31286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31287 Update description when bug
31288 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31291 target "http://www.lyx.org/trac/ticket/10825"
31304 \begin_layout Subsection
31305 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31306 \begin_inset Index idx
31309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31310 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31318 \begin_layout Standard
31319 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31320 -code of the symbol
31322 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31324 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31327 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31328 LatexCommand nomenclature
31330 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31338 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31342 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31343 LatexCommand nomenclature
31346 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31352 They will be sorted by
31353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31379 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31382 will be sorted before the
31386 since the character
31387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31394 is considered in sorting.
31397 \begin_layout Standard
31398 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31401 \begin_inset space ~
31406 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31407 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31409 For the example given, you can insert
31413 in this field for the
31414 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31421 will be located before
31422 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31428 \begin_layout Standard
31429 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31434 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31444 \begin_layout Subsection
31445 Nomenclature Options
31446 \begin_inset Index idx
31449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31450 Nomenclature ! Options
31458 \begin_layout Standard
31463 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31464 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31467 \begin_layout Description
31468 refeq Appends the phrase
31469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31484 to every nomenclature entry, where
31490 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31493 \begin_layout Description
31494 refpage Appends the phrase
31495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31510 to every nomenclature entry, where
31516 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31519 \begin_layout Description
31520 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31523 \begin_layout Standard
31524 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31525 class options list in the
31527 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31531 In this document the options
31538 \begin_layout Standard
31539 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31545 \begin_layout Standard
31546 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31547 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31552 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31555 \begin_layout Description
31565 \begin_layout Description
31568 nomrefpage Like the
31575 \begin_layout Description
31578 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31587 \begin_layout Description
31591 \begin_inset space ~
31597 \begin_inset space ~
31602 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31605 \begin_layout Standard
31607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31614 are automatically translated for most document languages.
31615 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31619 \begin_layout Standard
31627 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
31630 \begin_inset Newline newline
31637 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
31642 \begin_inset Newline newline
31646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31661 by their translation.
31664 \begin_layout Subsection
31665 Printing the Nomenclature
31666 \begin_inset Index idx
31669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31670 Nomenclature ! Printing
31678 \begin_layout Standard
31679 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
31681 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31682 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31698 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
31699 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
31700 You can choose between these settings:
31703 \begin_layout Description
31704 Default a space of 1
31705 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31711 \begin_layout Description
31713 \begin_inset space ~
31717 \begin_inset space ~
31720 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
31723 \begin_layout Description
31724 Custom custom space
31727 \begin_layout Standard
31728 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
31729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31737 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
31745 For example, in order to change the name to
31749 , add the following line to the preamble:
31752 \begin_layout Standard
31760 nomname}{List of Symbols}
31763 \begin_layout Subsection
31764 Nomenclature Program
31765 \begin_inset Index idx
31768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31769 Nomenclature ! Program
31775 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31777 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
31784 \begin_layout Standard
31790 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31791 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
31793 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
31798 by adding options, see section
31799 \begin_inset space ~
31803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31805 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31810 The available options are listed and explained in
31811 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31813 key "nomencl,makeindex"
31821 \begin_layout Section
31823 \begin_inset Index idx
31826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31833 \begin_inset Index idx
31836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31837 Document ! Branches
31843 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31845 name "sec:Branches"
31852 \begin_layout Standard
31853 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
31854 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
31855 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
31856 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
31859 \begin_layout Standard
31860 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
31861 allows you to put text into branches.
31862 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
31863 To create a branch, either select the menu
31865 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31866 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
31869 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
31871 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31878 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
31879 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
31880 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
31881 and whether the name of the branch should
31882 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
31883 (see below for an example).
31884 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
31885 to the name of the other) and to add
31886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31894 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31898 \begin_inset space ~
31901 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
31902 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
31905 \begin_layout Standard
31906 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
31907 These boxes are inserted via the menu
31909 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31912 where you can choose a branch.
31913 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
31917 \begin_layout Standard
31918 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
31919 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
31922 \begin_layout Standard
31923 \begin_inset Branch Question
31927 \begin_layout Standard
31932 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
31940 \begin_layout Standard
31941 \begin_inset Branch Answer
31945 \begin_layout Standard
31950 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
31958 \begin_layout Standard
31965 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31966 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31969 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
31970 Consider for example a file
31971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31978 which has the above branches.
31980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31987 is active, the PDF export file would be called
31988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32011 branch were inactive,
32012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32027 branch was active, likewise
32028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32043 branch was active, and
32044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32047 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
32048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32051 if both branches were active.
32052 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
32053 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32059 \begin_layout Standard
32060 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
32066 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
32067 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
32071 \begin_inset space ~
32079 \begin_layout Standard
32080 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32084 \begin_layout Standard
32090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32097 branch is deactivated.
32103 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32109 \begin_layout Standard
32110 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32111 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32112 definitions for each branch.
32113 For example you can define for the question branch
32117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32118 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32119 -syntax, see section
32120 \begin_inset space ~
32124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32126 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32138 \begin_layout Standard
32148 \begin_layout Standard
32158 \begin_layout Standard
32159 and for the answer branch
32162 \begin_layout Standard
32172 \begin_layout Standard
32182 \begin_layout Standard
32183 \begin_inset Branch Question
32187 \begin_layout Standard
32191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32219 \begin_layout Standard
32220 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32224 \begin_layout Standard
32228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32256 \begin_layout Standard
32257 Now it is possible to use the
32261 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32268 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32271 commands to obtain conditional output.
32272 Here is an example formula where only the
32279 \begin_inset Formula
32281 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32289 \begin_layout Standard
32290 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32298 \begin_layout Standard
32299 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32301 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32305 \begin_inset space \space{}
32308 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32310 For this advanced usage, see the
32316 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32321 \begin_layout Section
32323 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32325 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32330 \begin_inset Index idx
32333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32342 \begin_layout Standard
32345 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32346 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32349 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32351 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32357 \begin_inset Index idx
32360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32362 packages ! hyperref
32367 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32368 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32369 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32370 part of the document.
32374 \begin_layout Standard
32375 The header information in the dialog tab
32379 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32380 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32381 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32382 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32386 \begin_inset space ~
32390 \begin_inset space ~
32395 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32396 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32397 and author entries.
32401 \begin_inset space ~
32405 \begin_inset space ~
32409 \begin_inset space ~
32414 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32417 \begin_layout Standard
32418 You can specify in the dialog tab
32422 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32427 \begin_inset space ~
32431 \begin_inset space ~
32435 \begin_inset space ~
32440 option allows long links to be split;
32443 \begin_inset space ~
32447 \begin_inset space ~
32451 \begin_inset space ~
32459 \begin_inset space ~
32464 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32467 \begin_inset space ~
32472 colors the different links.
32473 The default colors are:
32476 \begin_layout Labeling
32477 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32482 for hyperlinks and URLs
32485 \begin_layout Labeling
32486 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32494 \begin_layout Labeling
32495 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32503 \begin_layout Standard
32504 but you can change these in the field
32509 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32512 \begin_layout Standard
32515 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32518 \begin_layout Standard
32523 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32524 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32525 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32528 \begin_layout Standard
32533 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32534 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32535 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32545 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32546 when opening the PDF.
32548 \begin_inset space ~
32551 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32552 \begin_inset space ~
32555 1 will only display the sections.
32558 \begin_layout Standard
32559 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32560 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32566 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32567 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32577 \begin_layout Section
32579 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32581 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32583 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32590 \begin_layout Subsection
32593 \begin_inset Index idx
32596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32604 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32606 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32613 \begin_layout Standard
32614 As \SpecialChar LyX
32615 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32616 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32617 commands and constructs,
32620 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32621 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32622 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32623 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32624 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32625 cannot support all packages and
32629 \begin_layout Standard
32630 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32631 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32632 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32636 Code box is created by the menu
32638 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32640 \begin_inset space ~
32645 or by the toolbar button
32658 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
32666 \begin_layout Standard
32667 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
32669 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
32671 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
32675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32676 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
32681 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32688 , you can write the command part
32694 in a \SpecialChar TeX
32695 Code box before the word and the closing brace
32699 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
32700 Code box behind the word.
32701 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
32702 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
32706 \begin_layout Standard
32707 \begin_inset Graphics
32708 filename clipart/ERT.png
32716 \begin_layout Standard
32720 \begin_layout Standard
32721 This is a line with a
32725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32748 \begin_layout Standard
32749 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32757 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32758 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
32759 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
32760 know that the command is finished.
32768 \begin_layout Subsection
32769 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32771 \begin_inset Argument 1
32774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32775 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32782 \begin_inset Index idx
32785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32793 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32795 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32802 \begin_layout Standard
32803 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
32804 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32805 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
32806 uses in the background.
32807 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
32808 is based on commands, you can
32809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32817 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
32818 any time if you know the right commands.
32819 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
32820 is the end of the day.
32821 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
32822 all caption labels bold.
32823 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
32825 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
32829 \begin_layout Standard
32830 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
32832 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32834 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32837 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32847 \begin_layout Standard
32848 As result you find that the package
32853 \begin_inset Index idx
32856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32864 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
32866 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32869 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32873 \begin_inset space ~
32881 \begin_layout Standard
32886 usepackage[options]{package name}
32889 \begin_layout Standard
32890 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
32891 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
32892 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
32893 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
32896 \begin_layout Standard
32897 In your case the package name is
32902 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
32907 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
32908 So you add the command
32911 \begin_layout Standard
32916 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
32919 \begin_layout Standard
32920 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
32924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32925 For more commands provided by the
32929 package, have a look at its documentation,
32930 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32945 \begin_layout Standard
32946 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
32948 For example if you use a
32952 class, you don't need the package
32956 , you can instead write
32959 \begin_layout Standard
32964 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
32969 \begin_layout Standard
32970 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
32971 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
32972 documentation of the document class you want to use.
32979 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
32982 \begin_layout Standard
32983 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
32984 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
32986 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32987 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
32988 Code box as described in the previous
32992 \begin_layout Standard
32993 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
32994 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32997 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32999 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
33007 \begin_layout Standard
33008 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33014 \begin_layout Standard
33018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33028 \begin_inset Note Note
33031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33032 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
33040 \begin_layout Left Header
33041 \begin_inset Argument 1
33044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33064 \begin_inset Note Note
33067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33068 defines the header line as described below
33076 \begin_layout Center Header
33077 \begin_inset Argument 1
33080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33089 \begin_layout Right Header
33090 \begin_inset Argument 1
33093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33114 \begin_layout Left Footer
33115 \begin_inset Argument 1
33118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33139 \begin_layout Center Footer
33140 \begin_inset Argument 1
33143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33155 \begin_inset Newline newline
33159 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33165 \begin_layout Right Footer
33166 \begin_inset Argument 1
33169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33191 \begin_layout Section
33192 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33193 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33195 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33200 \begin_inset Index idx
33203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33204 Document ! Header/Footer line
33210 \begin_inset Index idx
33213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33222 \begin_layout Standard
33223 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33227 \begin_inset space ~
33238 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33244 \begin_inset space ~
33250 As a second step add in the menu
33252 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33253 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33262 Custom Header/Footerlines
33265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33269 This module offers the following 6
33270 \begin_inset space ~
33276 \begin_layout Description
33278 \begin_inset space ~
33282 \begin_inset space ~
33286 \begin_inset space ~
33290 \begin_inset space ~
33294 \begin_inset space ~
33300 \begin_layout Description
33302 \begin_inset space ~
33306 \begin_inset space ~
33310 \begin_inset space ~
33314 \begin_inset space ~
33318 \begin_inset space ~
33324 \begin_layout Standard
33325 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33326 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33329 \begin_layout Standard
33330 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33331 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33333 \begin_inset space ~
33337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33339 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33343 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33346 \begin_layout Standard
33347 \begin_inset Float figure
33353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33356 \begin_inset Tabular
33357 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33358 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33359 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33360 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33361 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33363 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33381 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33392 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33410 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33421 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33425 The normal text on the page goes here.
33426 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33428 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33429 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33434 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33443 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33454 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33472 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33483 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33501 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33519 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33522 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33524 name "fig:Page-layout"
33528 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33541 \begin_layout Standard
33542 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33550 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33554 \begin_inset space ~
33559 is set to “Default”.
33560 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33569 \begin_layout Subsection
33573 \begin_layout Standard
33574 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33575 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33576 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33577 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33579 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33581 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33584 \begin_layout Standard
33585 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33586 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33590 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33592 \begin_inset space ~
33600 \begin_layout Description
33603 thepage prints the current page number
33606 \begin_layout Description
33609 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33612 \begin_layout Description
33615 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33618 \begin_layout Description
33621 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33622 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33629 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33632 because it usually goes in a left header.
33635 \begin_layout Description
33638 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33639 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
33641 It is normally used in the right header.
33644 \begin_layout Subsection
33645 Default header/footer
33648 \begin_layout Standard
33649 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
33650 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
33651 footer has the page number.
33652 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
33653 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
33654 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
33657 \begin_inset space ~
33665 \begin_layout Subsection
33669 \begin_layout Standard
33670 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
33671 Some pages are different.
33672 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
33673 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
33674 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
33675 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
33676 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
33679 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33680 Header and footer decoration line
33683 \begin_layout Standard
33684 By default, you get a 0.4
33685 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33688 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
33689 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
33701 in the following way:
33704 \begin_layout Standard
33711 headrulewidth}{thickness}
33714 \begin_layout Standard
33715 where thickness is a size in standard units like
33728 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
33729 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33735 \begin_layout Standard
33736 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33738 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
33739 \begin_inset space ~
33743 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33753 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33754 Several header/footer lines
33757 \begin_layout Standard
33758 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
33759 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
33760 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
33762 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33777 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33778 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33780 \begin_inset space ~
33788 \begin_layout Standard
33795 headheight}{height}
33798 \begin_layout Standard
33803 is a size in standard units (e.
33804 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33808 \begin_inset space \space{}
33816 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
33817 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
33818 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33819 logfile with the menu
33821 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33823 \begin_inset space ~
33831 \begin_inset space ~
33836 to see if you can find a warning about the package
33841 \begin_inset Index idx
33844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33846 packages ! fancyhdr
33852 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
33853 for your header/footer.
33856 \begin_layout Subsection
33860 \begin_layout Standard
33861 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
33862 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
33863 This example consists of the following definition:
33866 \begin_layout Description
33868 \begin_inset space ~
33877 , empty optional argument
33880 \begin_layout Description
33882 \begin_inset space ~
33885 Header empty, empty optional argument
33888 \begin_layout Description
33890 \begin_inset space ~
33899 in the optional argument
33902 \begin_layout Description
33904 \begin_inset space ~
33913 in the optional argument
33916 \begin_layout Description
33918 \begin_inset space ~
33931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33935 \begin_inset Newline newline
33939 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33946 in the optional argument
33949 \begin_layout Description
33951 \begin_inset space ~
33960 , empty optional argument
33963 \begin_layout Description
33966 headrulewidth set to 2
33967 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33973 \begin_layout Standard
33974 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
33975 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
33981 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33991 \begin_layout Standard
33992 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33998 \begin_layout Standard
34002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34006 pagestyle{headings}
34012 \begin_inset Note Note
34015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34016 switches back to page style with the default headings
34024 \begin_layout Section
34025 Previewing Snippets of your Document
34026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34028 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34033 \begin_inset Index idx
34036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34043 \begin_inset Index idx
34046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34055 \begin_layout Standard
34057 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
34058 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
34059 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
34062 \begin_layout Subsection
34066 \begin_layout Standard
34067 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34073 \begin_inset Index idx
34076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34078 packages ! preview-latex
34083 (on some systems named simply
34088 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34090 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34097 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34099 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34107 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34108 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34109 -package are automatically
34110 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34114 \begin_layout Subsection
34118 \begin_layout Standard
34119 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34120 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34122 activate the option
34125 \begin_inset space ~
34132 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34138 \begin_inset space ~
34142 \begin_inset space ~
34145 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34152 \begin_inset space ~
34165 \begin_inset space ~
34170 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34173 \begin_layout Standard
34174 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34179 \begin_inset space ~
34187 \begin_inset space ~
34195 \begin_layout Standard
34196 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34197 and when you finish
34201 \begin_layout Standard
34202 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34210 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34211 generated by activating the option
34214 \begin_inset space ~
34220 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34228 \begin_layout Subsection
34229 Selected document parts
34232 \begin_layout Standard
34233 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34234 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34235 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34236 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34238 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34240 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34244 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34245 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34246 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34249 \begin_layout Standard
34250 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34257 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34269 is explained in section
34271 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34276 \begin_inset space ~
34286 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34287 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34288 the final rotated boxes,
34289 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34290 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34292 Here is the result:
34295 \begin_layout Standard
34296 \begin_inset Preview
34298 \begin_layout Standard
34303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34307 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34313 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34323 height_special "totalheight"
34328 backgroundcolor "none"
34331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34356 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34362 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34384 \begin_layout Standard
34385 Previewing works also for colors.
34386 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34405 is explained in section
34412 \begin_inset space ~
34425 \begin_layout Standard
34426 \begin_inset Preview
34428 \begin_layout Standard
34432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34451 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34456 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34475 \begin_layout Standard
34476 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34482 \begin_layout Standard
34483 If \SpecialChar LyX
34484 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34485 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34486 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34487 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34488 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34489 the \SpecialChar TeX
34491 If \SpecialChar LyX
34492 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34493 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34495 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34496 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34497 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34500 \begin_layout Subsection
34505 \begin_layout Standard
34506 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34507 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34510 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34512 \begin_inset space ~
34517 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34519 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34521 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34522 's main window, then only this selection
34523 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34524 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34525 the source view window.
34530 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34531 ; but note that if you have
34532 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34534 not just the one which is open at the time.
34537 \begin_layout Section
34538 Advanced Find and Replace
34539 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34541 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34546 \begin_inset Index idx
34549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34556 \begin_inset Index idx
34559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34568 \begin_layout Subsection
34572 \begin_layout Standard
34573 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34574 allows for searching of complex,
34575 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34577 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34578 The key-features are:
34581 \begin_layout Itemize
34582 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34583 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34584 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34588 \begin_layout Itemize
34589 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34590 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34591 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34592 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34595 \begin_layout Itemize
34596 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34597 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34598 outside of mathematics environments
34601 \begin_layout Itemize
34602 Search may be widened to a specific
34607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34611 \begin_inset space ~
34614 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34615 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34622 \begin_layout Itemize
34623 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34624 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34629 \begin_inset space ~
34632 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34635 \begin_layout Subsection
34639 \begin_layout Standard
34640 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
34642 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34655 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
34658 ) or the toolbar button
34661 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
34667 Advanced Find and Replace
34672 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34676 \begin_layout Standard
34682 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
34686 \begin_inset space ~
34691 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
34694 arg "paragraph-break"
34698 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
34699 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
34703 arg "paragraph-break"
34706 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
34710 searches backwards.
34713 \begin_layout Standard
34717 \begin_inset space ~
34722 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
34731 \begin_inset space ~
34736 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
34739 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34740 Searching for mathematics
34743 \begin_layout Standard
34744 Mathematical formulas, such as
34745 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
34748 or something more complex like
34749 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
34752 , may be searched for by typing them in the
34757 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
34758 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
34759 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
34760 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
34766 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34770 \begin_layout Standard
34771 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
34772 This is done by switching to the
34776 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
34781 This way, entering in the
34788 \begin_layout Itemize
34789 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
34790 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
34793 \begin_layout Itemize
34794 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
34795 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
34798 \begin_layout Itemize
34799 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
34800 of it only within section headings.
34801 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
34802 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
34806 \begin_layout Itemize
34807 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
34808 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
34811 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34815 \begin_layout Standard
34816 The entries made in the
34820 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
34823 \begin_inset space ~
34829 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
34833 button or alternatively press
34836 arg "paragraph-break"
34843 while the cursor is in the
34846 \begin_inset space ~
34854 \begin_layout Standard
34855 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
34857 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
34861 \begin_layout Itemize
34862 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
34863 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
34864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34871 with its typewriter version
34872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34886 \begin_layout Itemize
34887 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
34889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34893 \begin_inset Formula $R$
34897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34905 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
34909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34912 (you may want to enable the
34915 \begin_inset space ~
34923 \begin_inset space ~
34928 options and disable the
34936 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
34937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34944 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
34945 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
34949 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
34952 , or occurrences of
34953 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
34957 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
34963 \begin_layout Subsection
34967 \begin_layout Standard
34968 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
34972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34973 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
34975 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34977 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
34987 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
34993 This is done with the context menu
34995 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34996 Insert Regular Expression
34998 while the cursor is in the
35003 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
35004 expression matching rules
35008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35009 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
35012 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35016 \begin_inset space ~
35019 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
35020 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
35026 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
35027 same text in the document.
35028 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
35029 Examples of using such a feature may be:
35032 \begin_layout Enumerate
35033 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
35038 editor the fraction
35039 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
35043 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35046 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
35047 fractions with the given denominator.
35050 \begin_layout Enumerate
35051 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
35063 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35068 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
35069 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
35070 Also, by inserting a
35071 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35074 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
35075 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
35078 \begin_layout Standard
35079 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35080 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35081 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35084 , and referring back to them through
35085 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35089 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35093 For example, try searching with the regexp
35094 \begin_inset Newline newline
35097 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35100 \begin_inset Newline newline
35103 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35106 \begin_layout Standard
35107 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35110 \begin_layout Standard
35111 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35119 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35120 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35121 sub-expressions is absolute.
35123 \begin_inset space ~
35127 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35130 always refers to the first occurrence of
35131 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35134 in all entered regexps.
35142 \begin_layout Section
35144 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35146 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35151 \begin_inset Index idx
35154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35163 \begin_layout Standard
35165 has a built-in spell checker.
35168 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35175 key or the toolbar button
35178 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35181 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35182 beginning of the currently selected text.
35183 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35184 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35185 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35186 scrolled so that it is visible.
35187 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35188 n, if any could be found.
35189 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35193 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35194 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35197 \begin_layout Standard
35198 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35201 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35205 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35206 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35208 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35209 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35212 \begin_inset space ~
35220 arg "dialog-show character"
35223 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35225 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35228 \begin_layout Standard
35229 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35230 can be downloaded from here:
35231 \begin_inset Newline newline
35235 \begin_inset Flex URL
35238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35240 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35246 \begin_inset Newline newline
35250 \begin_inset space ~
35253 files for each language.
35254 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35255 \begin_inset space ~
35258 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35259 's installation subfolder
35267 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35269 \begin_inset Newline newline
35272 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35273 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35274 but in most cases these are
35290 is the language code.
35293 \begin_layout Subsection
35297 \begin_layout Standard
35300 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35301 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35303 \begin_inset space ~
35306 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35309 you can set the following things:
35312 \begin_layout Description
35314 \begin_inset space ~
35317 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35318 should use for spell checking.
35319 Depending on your platform,
35333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35334 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35335 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35350 \begin_inset space ~
35353 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35356 \begin_layout Description
35358 \begin_inset space ~
35361 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35362 will always use the given language
35363 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35366 \begin_layout Description
35368 \begin_inset space ~
35371 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35373 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35377 \begin_inset space \space{}
35381 This should normally not be needed.
35384 \begin_layout Description
35386 \begin_inset space ~
35390 \begin_inset space ~
35393 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35405 \begin_layout Description
35407 \begin_inset space ~
35410 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35411 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35412 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35413 appear in a context menu.
35414 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35418 \begin_layout Description
35420 \begin_inset space ~
35424 \begin_inset space ~
35428 \begin_inset space ~
35431 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35435 \begin_layout Section
35437 \begin_inset Index idx
35440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35447 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35449 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35456 \begin_layout Standard
35458 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35459 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35469 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35471 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35481 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35483 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35484 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35485 which are available for many languages.
35488 \begin_layout Standard
35489 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35490 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35494 \begin_layout Subsection
35495 Setting up the thesaurus
35498 \begin_layout Standard
35507 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35511 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35516 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35518 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35522 \begin_inset space ~
35530 For instance, the US English files are named:
35533 \begin_layout Itemize
35537 \begin_layout Itemize
35541 \begin_layout Standard
35550 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35551 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35554 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35555 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35556 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35558 \begin_inset space ~
35563 ) to the path where they are installed.
35567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35568 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35569 ies, typical locations are
35575 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35579 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35583 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35586 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35592 LibreOffice-<Version>
35599 On the Mac, the default location is
35601 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35602 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35603 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35604 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35605 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35606 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35614 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35615 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35616 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35620 \begin_layout Standard
35621 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35622 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35626 \begin_layout Itemize
35627 \begin_inset Flex URL
35630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35632 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
35640 \begin_layout Standard
35641 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
35642 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
35644 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35645 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35646 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35648 \begin_inset space ~
35653 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35655 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
35656 and point \SpecialChar LyX
35660 \begin_layout Standard
35661 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
35663 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35666 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
35672 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
35675 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
35676 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
35678 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35684 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35685 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35686 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35688 \begin_inset space ~
35693 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
35696 \begin_layout Subsection
35697 Using the thesaurus
35700 \begin_layout Standard
35701 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
35703 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35706 or the toolbar button
35709 arg "thesaurus-entry"
35712 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
35714 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
35716 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
35717 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
35718 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
35727 ), related terms (such as
35730 \begin_inset space ~
35739 ), compounds (such as
35742 \begin_inset space ~
35751 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
35760 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
35763 \begin_layout Standard
35764 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
35765 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
35769 \begin_layout Standard
35770 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
35771 the dictionary, such as the above
35775 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
35776 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35780 \begin_inset space \space{}
35783 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
35784 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
35785 For example, looking up the word form
35789 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
35794 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
35795 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35799 \begin_inset space \space{}
35810 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
35811 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
35812 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
35815 \begin_layout Section
35817 \begin_inset Index idx
35820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35827 \begin_inset Index idx
35830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35831 Document ! Change Tracking
35837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35839 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
35846 \begin_layout Standard
35847 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
35848 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
35849 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
35850 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
35852 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35854 \begin_inset space ~
35857 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35859 \begin_inset space ~
35867 \begin_layout Standard
35868 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
35882 The color depends on the author that made the change.
35883 You can change the color in
35885 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35886 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35888 \begin_inset space ~
35892 \begin_inset space ~
35897 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35903 \begin_inset Index idx
35906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35907 Color ! Change tracking
35912 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
35913 's status bar when the
35914 cursor is in changed text.
35915 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
35918 arg "changes-merge"
35924 \begin_layout Standard
35925 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
35927 \begin_inset Index idx
35930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35939 \begin_layout Standard
35940 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35946 \begin_layout Standard
35947 \begin_inset Graphics
35948 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
35956 \begin_layout Standard
35957 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35963 \begin_layout Standard
35964 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
35967 \begin_layout Standard
35968 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35974 \begin_layout Standard
35975 \begin_inset Tabular
35976 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
35977 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
35978 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35979 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35980 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35989 arg "changes-track"
35997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36003 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36005 \begin_inset space ~
36008 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36010 \begin_inset space ~
36019 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36028 arg "changes-output"
36036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36042 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36044 \begin_inset space ~
36047 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36049 \begin_inset space ~
36053 \begin_inset space ~
36057 \begin_inset space ~
36066 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36087 Jumps to the next change
36093 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36102 arg "change-accept"
36110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36116 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36118 \begin_inset space ~
36121 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36123 \begin_inset space ~
36132 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36141 arg "change-reject"
36149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36155 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36157 \begin_inset space ~
36160 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36162 \begin_inset space ~
36171 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36180 arg "changes-merge"
36188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36194 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36196 \begin_inset space ~
36199 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36201 \begin_inset space ~
36210 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36219 arg "all-changes-accept"
36227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36233 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36235 \begin_inset space ~
36238 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36240 \begin_inset space ~
36244 \begin_inset space ~
36253 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36262 arg "all-changes-reject"
36270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36276 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36278 \begin_inset space ~
36281 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36283 \begin_inset space ~
36287 \begin_inset space ~
36296 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36319 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36320 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36322 \begin_inset space ~
36331 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36354 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36356 \begin_inset space ~
36372 \begin_layout Standard
36373 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36379 \begin_layout Standard
36380 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36400 \begin_layout Standard
36401 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36402 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36403 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36404 the next change after the current cursor position.
36405 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36406 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36407 step to the next change.
36408 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36411 \begin_layout Standard
36412 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36413 to describe a change.
36416 \begin_layout Standard
36417 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36423 \begin_inset Index idx
36426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36434 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36436 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36443 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36447 \begin_layout Section
36448 Comparison of Documents
36449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36451 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36456 \begin_inset Index idx
36459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36460 Comparison of documents
36468 \begin_layout Standard
36469 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36472 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36476 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36477 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36479 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36481 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36485 \begin_inset space ~
36489 \begin_inset space ~
36493 \begin_inset space ~
36502 \begin_inset space ~
36506 \begin_inset space ~
36510 \begin_inset space ~
36514 \begin_inset space ~
36518 \begin_inset space ~
36522 \begin_inset space ~
36527 enables the change tracking option
36530 \begin_inset space ~
36534 \begin_inset space ~
36538 \begin_inset space ~
36543 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36546 \begin_layout Section
36547 International Support
36548 \begin_inset Index idx
36551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36552 International support
36560 \begin_layout Standard
36561 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36562 with any language you want.
36563 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36564 up \SpecialChar LyX
36566 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36568 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
36576 \begin_layout Standard
36577 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36578 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36579 \begin_inset space ~
36583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36585 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36592 \begin_layout Subsection
36594 \begin_inset Index idx
36597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36604 \begin_inset Index idx
36607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36608 Document ! Settings
36614 \begin_inset Index idx
36617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36618 Document ! Language
36626 \begin_layout Standard
36629 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36630 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36633 dialog lets you set
36635 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36640 \begin_layout Standard
36645 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36650 \begin_inset space ~
36655 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
36656 For details about the different encoding options see section
36657 \begin_inset space ~
36661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36663 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
36670 \begin_layout Subsection
36671 Keyboard mapping configuration
36672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36674 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
36681 \begin_layout Standard
36682 If you have for example a U.
36683 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36686 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
36687 can use an alternate keymap.
36688 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
36693 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36694 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36695 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
36698 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
36699 \begin_inset space ~
36703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36705 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
36710 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
36711 which one you want to use.
36714 \begin_layout Standard
36715 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
36716 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
36717 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
36718 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36721 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
36722 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
36723 one to support the characters you want.
36724 This and many other customizations are explained in the
36731 \begin_layout Chapter
36734 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36736 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
36743 \begin_layout Standard
36744 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
36745 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
36746 topic inside the user's guide.
36749 \begin_layout Section
36751 \begin_inset Index idx
36754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36763 \begin_layout Standard
36768 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
36771 \begin_layout Subsection
36775 \begin_layout Standard
36776 Creates a new document.
36779 \begin_layout Subsection
36783 \begin_layout Standard
36784 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
36785 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
36786 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
36789 \begin_layout Subsection
36793 \begin_layout Standard
36797 \begin_layout Subsection
36801 \begin_layout Standard
36802 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
36803 Click there on a file to open it.
36806 \begin_layout Subsection
36810 \begin_layout Standard
36811 Closes the current document.
36814 \begin_layout Subsection
36818 \begin_layout Standard
36819 Closes all opened documents.
36822 \begin_layout Subsection
36826 \begin_layout Standard
36827 Saves the actual document.
36830 \begin_layout Subsection
36834 \begin_layout Standard
36835 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
36838 \begin_layout Subsection
36842 \begin_layout Standard
36843 Saves all opened documents.
36846 \begin_layout Subsection
36850 \begin_layout Standard
36851 Reloads the actual document from disk.
36854 \begin_layout Subsection
36858 \begin_layout Standard
36859 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
36860 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
36861 It is described in the section
36863 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
36868 Additional Features
36873 \begin_layout Subsection
36877 \begin_layout Standard
36878 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
36879 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
36881 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
36882 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
36886 \begin_layout Standard
36887 When using the menu entry
36890 \begin_inset space ~
36895 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
36899 \begin_inset space ~
36903 \begin_inset space ~
36907 \begin_inset space ~
36912 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
36913 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
36916 \begin_layout Subsection
36918 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36920 name "subsec:Export"
36927 \begin_layout Standard
36928 You can export your document to various file formats.
36929 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
36931 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
36932 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
36933 during its configuration.
36936 \begin_layout Standard
36937 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
36939 \begin_inset space ~
36943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36945 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
36952 \begin_layout Description
36958 \begin_inset space ~
36961 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
36963 \begin_inset space ~
36966 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
36967 \begin_inset Newline newline
36970 Since \SpecialChar LyX
36971 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
36975 \begin_layout Description
36976 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
36982 \begin_layout Description
36984 \begin_inset space ~
36987 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
36993 \begin_layout Description
36994 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
36995 's native DVI-format.
36996 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
36997 files paths or file names in your document.
36999 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
37006 \begin_layout Description
37007 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
37008 in files paths or file names
37011 \begin_layout Description
37013 \begin_inset space ~
37020 ) DVI-format using the program
37022 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37025 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
37029 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37037 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
37045 \begin_layout Description
37047 \begin_inset space ~
37050 (cropped) the same as
37054 but with cropped page margins.
37057 \begin_layout Description
37059 \begin_inset space ~
37062 Dot text file with code in the programming language
37066 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
37071 \begin_layout Description
37075 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37083 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37091 \begin_layout Description
37093 \begin_inset space ~
37097 \begin_inset space ~
37100 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37104 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37112 \begin_layout Description
37116 \begin_inset space ~
37125 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37126 source that is compilable with the program
37128 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37132 \begin_layout Description
37136 \begin_inset space ~
37141 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37142 source, additionally all images used in the document
37143 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37147 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37150 \begin_layout Description
37154 \begin_inset space ~
37159 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37160 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37161 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37169 \begin_layout Description
37173 \begin_inset space ~
37182 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37183 source that is compilable with the program
37189 \begin_layout Description
37191 \begin_inset space ~
37195 \begin_inset space ~
37202 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37203 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37209 \begin_layout Description
37211 \begin_inset space ~
37214 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37215 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37221 \begin_inset space \space{}
37226 \begin_inset space ~
37230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37245 represent the version number)
37248 \begin_layout Description
37250 \begin_inset space ~
37254 \begin_inset space ~
37257 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37258 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37259 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37263 \begin_layout Description
37264 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37265 's internal XHTML engine
37268 \begin_layout Description
37270 \begin_inset space ~
37274 \begin_inset space ~
37278 \begin_inset space ~
37282 \begin_inset space ~
37285 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37290 For the conversion the program
37299 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37302 \begin_layout Description
37303 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37308 \begin_layout Description
37310 \begin_inset space ~
37313 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37315 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37318 For the conversion the program
37327 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37330 \begin_layout Description
37332 \begin_inset space ~
37335 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37336 For the conversion the program
37345 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37348 \begin_layout Description
37350 \begin_inset space ~
37353 (cropped) the same as
37356 \begin_inset space ~
37361 but with cropped page margins
37364 \begin_layout Description
37368 \begin_inset space ~
37373 PDF-format using the program
37377 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37380 \begin_layout Description
37384 \begin_inset space ~
37388 \begin_inset space ~
37396 \begin_inset space ~
37401 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37406 \begin_inset space \space{}
37409 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37413 \begin_layout Description
37417 \begin_inset space ~
37422 PDF-format using the program
37424 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37427 , produces PDF-files directly
37430 \begin_layout Description
37434 \begin_inset space ~
37439 PDF-format using the program
37443 , produces PDF-files directly
37446 \begin_layout Description
37450 \begin_inset space ~
37455 PDF-format using the program
37459 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37462 \begin_layout Description
37466 \begin_inset space ~
37471 PDF-format using the program
37476 , produces PDF-files directly
37479 \begin_layout Description
37483 \begin_inset space ~
37491 \begin_layout Description
37495 \begin_inset space ~
37499 \begin_inset space ~
37504 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37505 and then exported as text using the program
37510 \begin_layout Description
37515 PostScript format using the program
37523 options see section
37524 \begin_inset space ~
37528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37530 reference "subsec:General-output"
37537 \begin_layout Description
37538 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37539 source and also code in the statistical programming
37553 it is possible to use
37557 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37561 \begin_layout Standard
37562 If one of the menu entries
37569 \begin_inset space ~
37578 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37580 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37582 \begin_inset space ~
37586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37588 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37593 \begin_inset Index idx
37596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37597 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37606 \begin_layout Subsection
37610 \begin_layout Standard
37611 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37612 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37615 \begin_inset space ~
37619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37621 reference "sec:Paths"
37626 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37635 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37636 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37637 's preferences as described in section
37638 \begin_inset space ~
37642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37644 reference "subsec:Converters"
37651 \begin_layout Subsection
37652 New and Close Window
37655 \begin_layout Standard
37656 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
37660 \begin_layout Subsection
37664 \begin_layout Standard
37665 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
37668 \begin_layout Section
37670 \begin_inset Index idx
37673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37682 \begin_layout Subsection
37686 \begin_layout Standard
37687 Described in section
37688 \begin_inset space ~
37692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37694 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
37701 \begin_layout Subsection
37702 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
37705 \begin_layout Standard
37706 Described in section
37707 \begin_inset space ~
37711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37713 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37720 \begin_layout Subsection
37724 \begin_layout Standard
37725 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
37726 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
37729 \begin_layout Subsection
37733 \begin_layout Standard
37734 Selects the whole document.
37737 \begin_layout Subsection
37738 Find & Replace (Quick)
37741 \begin_layout Standard
37742 Described in section
37743 \begin_inset space ~
37747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37749 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37756 \begin_layout Subsection
37757 Find & Replace (Advanced)
37760 \begin_layout Standard
37761 Described in section
37762 \begin_inset space ~
37766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37768 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37775 \begin_layout Subsection
37776 Move Paragraph Up/Down
37779 \begin_layout Standard
37780 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
37784 \begin_layout Subsection
37788 \begin_layout Standard
37789 Described in section
37790 \begin_inset space ~
37794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37796 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
37803 \begin_layout Subsection
37805 \begin_inset Index idx
37808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37809 Paragraph ! Settings
37817 \begin_layout Standard
37818 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
37819 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
37823 \begin_layout Standard
37824 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
37825 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
37831 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37832 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37834 \begin_inset space ~
37842 \begin_layout Subsection
37843 Table and Rows & Columns
37846 \begin_layout Standard
37847 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
37848 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
37849 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
37852 \begin_layout Subsection
37856 \begin_layout Standard
37857 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
37858 It will dissolve this inset.
37859 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
37863 \begin_layout Subsection
37867 \begin_layout Standard
37868 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
37869 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
37872 \begin_layout Subsection
37873 Increase/Decrease List Depth
37876 \begin_layout Standard
37877 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
37879 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
37880 \begin_inset space ~
37884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37886 reference "sec:Nesting"
37891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37893 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
37900 \begin_layout Subsection
37903 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
37906 \begin_layout Standard
37907 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
37908 nts of the same type.
37910 \begin_inset space ~
37914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37916 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
37920 for an explanation.
37923 \begin_layout Section
37925 \begin_inset Index idx
37928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37937 \begin_layout Standard
37938 At the bottom of the
37942 menu the opened documents are listed.
37945 \begin_layout Subsection
37946 Open/Close all Insets
37949 \begin_layout Standard
37950 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
37953 \begin_layout Subsection
37954 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
37957 \begin_layout Standard
37958 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
37961 \begin_layout Standard
37962 Math macros are described in the
37969 \begin_layout Subsection
37973 \begin_layout Standard
37974 Shows the outline window as described in sections
37975 \begin_inset space ~
37979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37981 reference "sec:Navigating"
37986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37988 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
37995 \begin_layout Subsection
37999 \begin_layout Standard
38000 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
38002 \begin_inset space ~
38006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38008 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38015 \begin_layout Subsection
38019 \begin_layout Standard
38020 Opens a window showing console messages.
38021 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
38023 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38026 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
38027 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
38028 is processing the document.
38031 \begin_layout Subsection
38033 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38035 name "subsec:Toolbars"
38040 \begin_inset Index idx
38043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38052 \begin_layout Standard
38053 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
38054 All toolbars and the
38057 \begin_inset space ~
38062 can be turned on and off.
38067 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38079 \begin_inset space ~
38091 \begin_inset space ~
38096 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38100 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38107 \begin_layout Standard
38112 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38116 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38117 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38118 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38119 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38120 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38123 \begin_layout Standard
38125 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38126 \begin_inset space ~
38130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38132 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38139 \begin_layout Subsection
38143 \begin_layout Standard
38147 \begin_inset space ~
38151 \begin_inset space ~
38155 \begin_inset space ~
38159 \begin_inset space ~
38163 \begin_inset space ~
38167 \begin_inset space ~
38172 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38173 's main window vertically while
38176 \begin_inset space ~
38180 \begin_inset space ~
38184 \begin_inset space ~
38188 \begin_inset space ~
38192 \begin_inset space ~
38196 \begin_inset space ~
38201 will split it horizontally.
38202 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38203 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38204 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38205 three or more documents at the same time.
38206 To close a split view, use the menu
38209 \begin_inset space ~
38213 \begin_inset space ~
38221 \begin_layout Subsection
38225 \begin_layout Standard
38226 Closes a split view.
38229 \begin_layout Subsection
38233 \begin_layout Standard
38234 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38235 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38236 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38237 's main window fullscreen.
38238 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38239 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38242 \begin_layout Section
38244 \begin_inset Index idx
38247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38256 \begin_layout Subsection
38260 \begin_layout Standard
38261 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38262 \begin_inset space ~
38266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38268 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38279 \begin_layout Subsection
38281 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38283 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38290 \begin_layout Standard
38291 Here you can insert the following characters:
38294 \begin_layout Description
38299 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38302 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38303 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38304 -packages you have installed.
38305 You can get a complete display by checking
38308 \begin_inset space ~
38314 \begin_inset Newline newline
38318 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38326 Not all characters will be visible in the
38330 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38331 dialog (see section
38332 \begin_inset space ~
38336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38338 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38342 ) can display every character.
38350 \begin_layout Description
38351 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38355 \begin_layout Description
38357 \begin_inset space ~
38361 \begin_inset space ~
38364 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38365 \begin_inset space ~
38369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38371 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38378 \begin_layout Description
38380 \begin_inset space ~
38383 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38386 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38387 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38393 \begin_layout Description
38395 \begin_inset space ~
38398 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38401 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38402 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38408 \begin_layout Description
38410 \begin_inset space ~
38413 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38417 \begin_layout Description
38419 \begin_inset space ~
38422 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38426 \begin_layout Description
38428 \begin_inset space ~
38431 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38437 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38443 \begin_layout Description
38445 \begin_inset space ~
38448 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38452 \begin_layout Description
38454 \begin_inset space ~
38458 \begin_inset Index idx
38461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38468 \begin_inset Index idx
38471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38472 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38477 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38478 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38480 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38486 \begin_inset Index idx
38489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38497 \begin_inset Newline newline
38500 More information about this feature can be found in the
38506 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38512 \begin_layout Description
38513 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38515 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38516 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38520 \begin_layout Subsection
38524 \begin_layout Standard
38525 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38528 \begin_layout Description
38529 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38530 \begin_inset script superscript
38532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38541 \begin_layout Description
38542 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38543 \begin_inset script subscript
38545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38554 \begin_layout Description
38556 \begin_inset space ~
38559 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38560 \begin_inset space ~
38564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38566 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38573 \begin_layout Description
38575 \begin_inset space ~
38578 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38579 \begin_inset space ~
38583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38585 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38592 \begin_layout Description
38594 \begin_inset space ~
38597 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38598 \begin_inset space ~
38602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38604 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38611 \begin_layout Description
38613 \begin_inset space ~
38616 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38618 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38622 \begin_inset space \space{}
38625 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38626 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38635 To insert a fraction use the command
38640 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38644 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
38650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38653 The visible space is hereby the character before the
38660 \begin_layout Description
38662 \begin_inset space ~
38665 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
38666 \begin_inset space ~
38670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38672 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
38679 \begin_layout Description
38681 \begin_inset space ~
38684 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
38685 \begin_inset space ~
38689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38691 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
38698 \begin_layout Description
38700 \begin_inset space ~
38703 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
38704 \begin_inset space ~
38708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38710 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
38717 \begin_layout Description
38718 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
38719 \begin_inset space ~
38723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38725 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
38732 \begin_layout Description
38734 \begin_inset space ~
38737 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
38738 \begin_inset space ~
38742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38744 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
38751 \begin_layout Description
38753 \begin_inset space ~
38756 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
38757 \begin_inset space ~
38761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38763 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
38770 \begin_layout Description
38772 \begin_inset space ~
38776 \begin_inset space ~
38779 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
38782 \begin_inset space ~
38786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38788 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
38795 for a usage example.
38798 \begin_layout Description
38800 \begin_inset space ~
38804 \begin_inset space ~
38807 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
38808 \begin_inset space ~
38812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38814 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38821 \begin_layout Description
38823 \begin_inset space ~
38826 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
38827 as described in section
38828 \begin_inset space ~
38832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38834 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38841 \begin_layout Description
38843 \begin_inset space ~
38846 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
38847 \begin_inset space ~
38851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38853 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38860 \begin_layout Description
38862 \begin_inset space ~
38865 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
38866 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
38868 \begin_inset space ~
38872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38874 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38881 \begin_layout Description
38883 \begin_inset space ~
38886 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
38887 \begin_inset space ~
38891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38893 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
38900 \begin_layout Description
38902 \begin_inset space ~
38906 \begin_inset space ~
38909 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
38910 \begin_inset space ~
38914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38916 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
38923 \begin_layout Subsection
38927 \begin_layout Standard
38928 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
38932 \begin_inset space ~
38953 are described in section
38954 \begin_inset space ~
38958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38960 reference "sec:toc"
38969 is described in section
38970 \begin_inset space ~
38974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38976 reference "sec:Index"
38984 is described in section
38985 \begin_inset space ~
38989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38991 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
38997 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39000 is described in section
39001 \begin_inset space ~
39005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39007 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
39014 \begin_layout Subsection
39018 \begin_layout Standard
39019 To insert floats, as described in section
39020 \begin_inset space ~
39024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39026 reference "sec:Floats"
39030 and in detail the chapter
39037 \begin_inset space ~
39045 \begin_layout Subsection
39049 \begin_layout Standard
39050 To insert notes, described in section
39051 \begin_inset space ~
39055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39057 reference "sec:Notes"
39064 \begin_layout Subsection
39068 \begin_layout Standard
39069 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
39071 Branches are described in section
39072 \begin_inset space ~
39076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39078 reference "sec:Branches"
39085 \begin_layout Subsection
39089 \begin_layout Standard
39090 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39091 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39093 An example is the document class
39094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39101 with three custom insets.
39104 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39108 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39114 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39117 \begin_layout Subsection
39119 \begin_inset Index idx
39122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39131 \begin_layout Standard
39132 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39134 For more information see chapter
39136 External Document Parts
39139 \begin_inset space ~
39145 \begin_layout Subsection
39147 \begin_inset Index idx
39150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39159 \begin_layout Standard
39160 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39161 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39168 \begin_inset space ~
39176 \begin_layout Subsection
39180 \begin_layout Standard
39185 dialog as described in section
39186 \begin_inset space ~
39190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39192 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39199 \begin_layout Subsection
39203 \begin_layout Standard
39208 as described in section
39209 \begin_inset space ~
39213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39215 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39222 \begin_layout Subsection
39226 \begin_layout Standard
39231 as described in section
39232 \begin_inset space ~
39236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39238 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39245 \begin_layout Subsection
39247 \begin_inset Index idx
39250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39257 \begin_inset Index idx
39260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39261 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39269 \begin_layout Standard
39270 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39271 Floats are described in section
39272 \begin_inset space ~
39276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39278 reference "sec:Floats"
39282 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39284 Multi-page Captions
39289 \begin_inset space ~
39297 \begin_layout Subsection
39301 \begin_layout Standard
39302 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39303 \begin_inset space ~
39307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39309 reference "sec:Index"
39316 \begin_layout Subsection
39320 \begin_layout Standard
39321 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39322 \begin_inset space ~
39326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39328 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39335 \begin_layout Subsection
39339 \begin_layout Standard
39340 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39341 Tables are described in section
39342 \begin_inset space ~
39346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39348 reference "sec:Tables"
39352 and in detail in the chapter
39359 \begin_inset space ~
39367 \begin_layout Subsection
39371 \begin_layout Standard
39377 Graphics are described in section
39378 \begin_inset space ~
39382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39384 reference "sec:Graphics"
39391 \begin_layout Subsection
39395 \begin_layout Standard
39396 Inserts a URL as described in section
39397 \begin_inset space ~
39401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39403 reference "subsec:URLs"
39410 \begin_layout Subsection
39414 \begin_layout Standard
39415 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39416 \begin_inset space ~
39420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39422 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39429 \begin_layout Subsection
39433 \begin_layout Standard
39434 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39435 \begin_inset space ~
39439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39441 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39448 \begin_layout Subsection
39452 \begin_layout Standard
39453 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39454 \begin_inset space ~
39458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39460 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39467 \begin_layout Subsection
39471 \begin_layout Standard
39472 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39473 title or caption of a float.
39474 Inserts a short title as described in section
39475 \begin_inset space ~
39479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39481 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39488 \begin_layout Subsection
39493 \begin_layout Standard
39494 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39495 Code box as described in section
39496 \begin_inset space ~
39500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39502 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39509 \begin_layout Subsection
39511 \begin_inset Index idx
39514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39523 \begin_layout Standard
39524 Inserts a program listings box.
39525 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39527 Program Code Listings
39532 \begin_inset space ~
39540 \begin_layout Subsection
39544 \begin_layout Standard
39545 Inserts the actual date.
39546 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39551 \begin_layout Subsection
39555 \begin_layout Standard
39556 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39557 \begin_inset space ~
39561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39563 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39570 \begin_layout Section
39572 \begin_inset Index idx
39575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39584 \begin_layout Standard
39585 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39586 \begin_inset space ~
39589 of the current document.
39590 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39593 \begin_layout Subsection
39597 \begin_layout Standard
39598 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39599 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39600 to jump, for example, between section
39601 \begin_inset space ~
39605 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39606 \begin_inset space ~
39609 2.5 and use the submenu
39612 \begin_inset space ~
39616 \begin_inset space ~
39623 \begin_inset space ~
39629 \begin_inset space ~
39633 \begin_inset space ~
39639 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39643 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39649 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39652 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39655 \begin_layout Standard
39656 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
39660 \begin_inset space ~
39665 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
39668 \begin_inset space ~
39673 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
39676 \begin_layout Subsection
39677 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
39680 \begin_layout Standard
39681 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
39685 \begin_layout Subsection
39689 \begin_layout Standard
39690 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
39691 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
39692 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
39696 \begin_inset space ~
39700 \begin_inset space ~
39708 \begin_layout Subsection
39712 \begin_layout Standard
39713 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
39716 The \SpecialChar LyX
39717 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
39719 \begin_inset space ~
39727 \begin_inset space ~
39732 manual for a detailed description.
39735 \begin_layout Section
39737 \begin_inset Index idx
39740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39749 \begin_layout Subsection
39753 \begin_layout Standard
39754 Change Tracking is described in section
39755 \begin_inset space ~
39759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39761 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39768 \begin_layout Subsection
39776 \begin_layout Standard
39777 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
39778 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
39779 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39781 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
39782 to the clipboard or update the view.
39783 \begin_inset Newline newline
39786 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39790 \begin_layout Standard
39793 Open Containing Directory
39795 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
39796 's temporary folder for the document.
39797 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
39798 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
39799 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
39800 For example some journals require to send the
39804 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39808 \begin_layout Subsection
39809 Start Appendix Here
39812 \begin_layout Standard
39813 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
39814 as described in section
39815 \begin_inset space ~
39819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39821 reference "sec:Appendices"
39828 \begin_layout Subsection
39830 \begin_inset space ~
39836 \begin_layout Standard
39837 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
39838 default output format for the document (menu
39840 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39841 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39842 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39844 \begin_inset space ~
39848 \begin_inset space ~
39854 \begin_inset space ~
39858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39860 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
39864 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
39867 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39868 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39870 \begin_inset space ~
39873 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39875 \begin_inset space ~
39878 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39880 \begin_inset space ~
39884 \begin_inset space ~
39890 \begin_inset space ~
39894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39896 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39900 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
39901 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
39903 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39904 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39906 \begin_inset space ~
39909 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39911 \begin_inset space ~
39914 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39918 \begin_inset space ~
39922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39924 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39929 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
39930 when it is first configured.
39931 The default output format is
39934 \begin_inset space ~
39942 \begin_layout Subsection
39943 View (Other Formats)
39946 \begin_layout Standard
39947 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
39948 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
39949 actual document with an external program.
39950 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
39951 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39952 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
39954 All possible formats are listed in section
39955 \begin_inset space ~
39959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39961 reference "subsec:Export"
39966 You should at least see the menu entry
39971 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39973 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39975 \begin_inset space ~
39979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39981 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39986 \begin_inset Index idx
39989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39990 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39999 \begin_layout Standard
40000 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
40001 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40003 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40004 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40006 \begin_inset space ~
40009 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40011 \begin_inset space ~
40014 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40018 \begin_inset space ~
40022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40024 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40029 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40030 when it is first configured.
40033 \begin_layout Subsection
40035 \begin_inset space ~
40041 \begin_layout Standard
40042 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
40043 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
40046 \begin_layout Subsection
40047 Update (Other Formats)
40050 \begin_layout Standard
40051 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
40052 your document without opening a new viewer window.
40055 \begin_layout Subsection
40056 View Master Document
40059 \begin_layout Standard
40060 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40076 \begin_inset space ~
40081 manual for more information on this topic).
40082 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
40083 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40087 \begin_inset space ~
40091 \begin_inset space ~
40096 generates the output of the whole book, while
40100 will just output the chapter alone.
40103 \begin_layout Standard
40104 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40105 in the document settings (menu
40107 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40108 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40109 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40111 \begin_inset space ~
40115 \begin_inset space ~
40121 \begin_inset space ~
40125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40127 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40131 ) or in the preferences (menu
40133 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40134 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40136 \begin_inset space ~
40139 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40141 \begin_inset space ~
40144 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40146 \begin_inset space ~
40150 \begin_inset space ~
40156 \begin_inset space ~
40160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40162 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40169 \begin_layout Subsection
40170 Update Master Document
40173 \begin_layout Standard
40174 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40190 \begin_inset space ~
40195 manual for more information on this topic).
40196 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40197 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40200 \begin_layout Standard
40201 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40202 in the document settings (menu
40204 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40205 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40206 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40208 \begin_inset space ~
40212 \begin_inset space ~
40218 \begin_inset space ~
40222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40224 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40228 ) or in the preferences (menu
40230 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40231 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40233 \begin_inset space ~
40236 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40238 \begin_inset space ~
40241 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40243 \begin_inset space ~
40247 \begin_inset space ~
40253 \begin_inset space ~
40257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40259 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40266 \begin_layout Subsection
40268 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40270 name "subsec:Compressed"
40277 \begin_layout Standard
40278 Un/compresses the current document.
40279 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40280 compression (see the
40282 Additional Features
40284 manual for details).
40287 \begin_layout Subsection
40291 \begin_layout Standard
40292 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40295 \begin_layout Subsection
40299 \begin_layout Standard
40300 The document settings are described in appendix
40301 \begin_inset space ~
40305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40307 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40314 \begin_layout Section
40316 \begin_inset Index idx
40319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40328 \begin_layout Subsection
40332 \begin_layout Standard
40333 Spell checking is explained in section
40334 \begin_inset space ~
40338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40340 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40347 \begin_layout Subsection
40351 \begin_layout Standard
40352 The thesaurus is described in section
40353 \begin_inset space ~
40357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40359 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40366 \begin_layout Subsection
40368 \begin_inset Index idx
40371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40378 \begin_inset Index idx
40381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40390 \begin_layout Standard
40391 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40392 the highlighted document part.
40395 \begin_layout Subsection
40401 \begin_inset Index idx
40404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40405 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40414 \begin_layout Standard
40415 Generates with the help of the program
40417 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40420 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40421 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40422 This feature is not available on Windows.
40425 \begin_layout Subsection
40431 \begin_inset Index idx
40434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40444 \begin_layout Standard
40445 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40450 \begin_inset space ~
40455 to see the full filename paths.
40458 \begin_layout Subsection
40460 \begin_inset Index idx
40463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40472 \begin_layout Standard
40473 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40474 files as described in section
40475 \begin_inset space ~
40479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40481 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40488 \begin_layout Subsection
40490 \begin_inset Index idx
40493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40506 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40524 \begin_inset Index idx
40527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40528 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40537 \begin_layout Standard
40538 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40539 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40540 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40541 -packages and programs it needs; see
40543 \begin_inset space ~
40547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40549 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40556 \begin_layout Subsection
40560 \begin_layout Standard
40565 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40566 \begin_inset space ~
40570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40572 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40579 \begin_layout Section
40581 \begin_inset Index idx
40584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40593 \begin_layout Standard
40594 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40595 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40597 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40601 \begin_layout Standard
40605 \begin_inset space ~
40610 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40611 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40612 packages and classes found
40613 by \SpecialChar LyX
40615 \begin_inset space ~
40619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40621 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40628 \begin_layout Standard
40632 \begin_inset space ~
40637 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40642 \begin_layout Section
40644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40646 name "sec:Toolbars"
40653 \begin_layout Standard
40654 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40655 \begin_inset space ~
40659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40661 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
40668 \begin_layout Standard
40669 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
40670 This is described in the
40672 Additional Features
40677 \begin_layout Subsection
40679 \begin_inset Index idx
40682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40691 \begin_layout Standard
40692 \begin_inset Graphics
40693 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
40701 \begin_layout Standard
40702 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40708 \begin_layout Standard
40709 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40726 \begin_inset Note Note
40729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40730 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
40735 manual for more information.
40743 \begin_layout Standard
40744 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40750 \begin_layout Standard
40751 \begin_inset Tabular
40752 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
40753 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40754 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40755 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40761 \begin_inset Graphics
40762 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
40772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40776 pull-down box for the environments
40789 \begin_layout Standard
40790 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
40796 \begin_layout Standard
40798 \begin_inset Tabular
40799 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
40800 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40801 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40802 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40803 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40826 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40833 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40856 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40863 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40886 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40893 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40902 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
40910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40916 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40923 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40932 arg "spelling-continuously"
40940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40944 Spellcheck continuously
40950 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40973 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40980 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41003 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41010 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41033 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41040 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41063 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41070 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41093 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41100 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41109 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41123 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41125 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41133 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41142 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41149 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41163 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41165 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41169 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41173 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41182 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41191 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41205 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41206 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41213 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41234 Emphasize text, function of the
41236 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41238 \begin_inset space ~
41241 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41250 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41271 Set text to noun style, function of the
41273 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41275 \begin_inset space ~
41278 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41287 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41296 arg "textstyle-apply"
41304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41308 Format text using the current settings in the
41310 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41312 \begin_inset space ~
41315 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41324 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41347 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41348 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41350 \begin_inset space ~
41359 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41368 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41382 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41389 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41396 arg "tabular-insert"
41404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41410 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41417 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41426 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41438 Toggle outline window on/off,
41440 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41447 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41456 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41468 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41474 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41483 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41495 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41508 \begin_layout Subsection
41510 \begin_inset Index idx
41513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41522 \begin_layout Standard
41523 \begin_inset Graphics
41524 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41532 \begin_layout Standard
41533 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41539 \begin_layout Standard
41540 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41544 \begin_layout Standard
41545 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41551 \begin_layout Standard
41552 \begin_inset Tabular
41553 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41554 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41555 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41556 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41557 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41584 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41593 arg "layout Enumerate"
41601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41611 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41620 arg "layout Itemize"
41628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41638 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41665 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41674 arg "layout Description"
41682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41692 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41701 arg "depth-increment"
41709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41715 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41717 \begin_inset space ~
41721 \begin_inset space ~
41730 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41739 arg "depth-decrement"
41747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41753 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41755 \begin_inset space ~
41759 \begin_inset space ~
41768 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41777 arg "float-insert figure"
41785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41791 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41792 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41799 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41808 arg "float-insert table"
41816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41822 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41823 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41830 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41853 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41860 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41869 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
41877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41883 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41890 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41899 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
41907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41913 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41920 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41943 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41945 \begin_inset space ~
41954 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41963 arg "nomencl-insert"
41971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41977 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41979 \begin_inset space ~
41988 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41997 arg "footnote-insert"
42005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42011 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42018 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42027 arg "marginalnote-insert"
42035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42041 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42043 \begin_inset space ~
42052 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42075 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42076 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42078 \begin_inset space ~
42087 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42096 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42110 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42117 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42140 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42147 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42170 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42172 \begin_inset space ~
42181 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42190 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42204 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42205 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42212 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42221 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42235 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42236 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42238 \begin_inset space ~
42247 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42256 arg "dialog-show character"
42264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42270 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42272 \begin_inset space ~
42275 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42282 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42291 arg "layout-paragraph"
42299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42305 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42307 \begin_inset space ~
42316 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42325 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42339 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42353 \begin_layout Subsection
42354 View/Update Toolbar
42355 \begin_inset Index idx
42358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42359 Toolbar ! View / Update
42367 \begin_layout Standard
42368 \begin_inset Graphics
42369 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42376 \begin_layout Standard
42377 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42383 \begin_layout Standard
42384 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42388 \begin_layout Standard
42389 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42395 \begin_layout Standard
42396 \begin_inset Tabular
42397 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42398 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42399 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42400 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42401 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42424 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42431 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42440 arg "buffer-update"
42448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42454 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42461 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42470 arg "master-buffer-view"
42478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42484 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42486 \begin_inset space ~
42495 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42504 arg "master-buffer-update"
42512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42518 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42520 \begin_inset space ~
42524 \begin_inset space ~
42533 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42542 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42556 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42557 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42558 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42559 Synchronize with Output
42565 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42588 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42589 View (Other Formats)
42595 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42602 arg "update-others"
42610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42616 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42617 Update (Other Formats)
42630 \begin_layout Standard
42631 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42635 \begin_layout Subsection
42639 \begin_layout Standard
42640 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42641 \begin_inset space ~
42645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42647 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42651 , the table toolbar
42652 \begin_inset Index idx
42655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42664 \begin_inset space ~
42669 manual and the math macro toolbar
42670 \begin_inset Index idx
42673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42686 \begin_layout Chapter
42687 The Document Settings
42688 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42690 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42695 \begin_inset Index idx
42698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42699 Document ! Settings
42707 \begin_layout Standard
42711 \begin_inset space ~
42716 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
42717 is called with the menu
42719 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42723 You can save your document settings as default with the
42725 Save as Document Defaults
42727 button in any dialog.
42728 This will create a template named
42732 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
42733 when you create a new document without
42737 \begin_layout Standard
42742 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
42743 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
42746 \begin_layout Standard
42747 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
42748 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
42749 to find the one you are looking for.
42750 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
42751 the submenus of the dialog.
42753 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42757 \begin_inset space \space{}
42761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42768 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
42769 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
42770 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
42773 \begin_layout Section
42777 \begin_layout Standard
42778 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
42780 Document classes are described in section
42781 \begin_inset space ~
42785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42787 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
42795 \begin_layout Standard
42799 \begin_inset space ~
42804 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
42809 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
42810 as a layout for a document class.
42811 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
42813 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
42822 \begin_layout Standard
42823 Some classes use special class options by default.
42824 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
42828 and you can decide to use them or not.
42829 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
42830 recommended you leave them untouched.
42835 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42836 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
42841 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42843 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
42848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42849 When you want to use one of the following drivers
42850 \begin_inset Newline newline
42855 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
42858 \begin_inset Newline newline
42861 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42862 distribution, see section
42867 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42869 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
42882 \begin_layout Standard
42887 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
42888 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
42889 in the background if the child document
42890 is opened without its master.
42891 This way child documents are always compilable.
42892 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
42899 \begin_inset space ~
42907 \begin_layout Standard
42908 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42919 \begin_inset Index idx
42922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42924 packages ! prettyref
42930 \begin_inset Index idx
42933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42935 packages ! refstyle
42940 for cross-references, see section
42941 \begin_inset space ~
42945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42947 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42954 \begin_layout Section
42958 \begin_layout Standard
42959 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
42960 Please refer to the section
42963 \begin_inset space ~
42971 \begin_inset space ~
42976 manual for details.
42979 \begin_layout Section
42983 \begin_layout Standard
42984 Modules are explained in section
42985 \begin_inset space ~
42989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42991 reference "subsec:Modules"
42998 \begin_layout Section
43002 \begin_layout Standard
43004 \begin_inset space ~
43008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43010 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
43017 \begin_layout Section
43021 \begin_layout Standard
43022 The document font settings are described in section
43023 \begin_inset space ~
43027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43029 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
43036 \begin_layout Section
43040 \begin_layout Standard
43041 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
43053 \begin_inset space ~
43058 and whether it should be a
43061 \begin_inset space ~
43066 can also be specified here.
43069 \begin_layout Standard
43070 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
43071 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
43072 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
43074 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
43077 \begin_layout Standard
43080 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
43083 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
43084 justifies the text on screen.
43085 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43089 \begin_layout Section
43093 \begin_layout Standard
43094 This dialog is described in sections
43095 \begin_inset space ~
43099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43101 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43108 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43115 \begin_layout Section
43119 \begin_layout Standard
43120 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43121 \begin_inset space ~
43125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43127 reference "subsec:Margins"
43134 \begin_layout Section
43136 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43138 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43143 \begin_inset Index idx
43146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43147 Language ! Encoding
43155 \begin_layout Standard
43156 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43157 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43158 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43160 is always encoded in utf8).
43161 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43162 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43163 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43164 -command is not known for
43165 a particular character).
43168 \begin_layout Standard
43169 If you use the option
43174 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43175 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43176 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43178 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43179 exactly one encoding.
43180 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43183 \begin_layout Standard
43185 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43186 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43187 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43188 installation supports Unicode), choose
43189 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43190 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43191 is quite incomplete, so
43192 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43197 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43198 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43199 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43200 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43201 -commands is not used, because all
43202 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43203 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43204 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43205 , two new alternative engines
43206 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43208 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43210 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43213 \begin_inset space ~
43221 \begin_inset space ~
43229 \begin_inset space ~
43235 \begin_inset space ~
43239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43241 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43246 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43250 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43253 \begin_layout Standard
43257 \begin_inset space ~
43262 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43263 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43273 The possible settings are:
43276 \begin_layout Description
43277 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43279 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43280 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43284 \begin_inset space ~
43288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43290 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43297 \begin_layout Description
43298 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43299 format you will use.
43300 In many cases this will be
43305 \begin_inset Index idx
43308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43316 If the newer package
43321 \begin_inset Index idx
43324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43326 packages ! polyglossia
43331 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43332 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43333 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43335 this package will be used instead of
43342 \begin_layout Description
43344 \begin_inset space ~
43355 would be more appropriate.
43358 \begin_layout Description
43359 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43360 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43364 (for German texts), type in
43367 \begin_inset Newline newline
43372 usepackage{ngerman}
43375 \begin_layout Description
43376 None will not use a language package.
43377 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43380 \begin_layout Standard
43381 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43384 \begin_layout Description
43386 \begin_inset space ~
43390 \begin_inset space ~
43394 \begin_inset space ~
43401 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43407 \begin_inset Index idx
43410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43412 packages ! inputenc
43418 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43419 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43420 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43424 \begin_layout Description
43425 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43427 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43428 commands, which may result in a big
43429 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43430 -commands are needed.
43433 \begin_layout Description
43435 \begin_inset space ~
43439 \begin_inset space ~
43442 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43445 \begin_layout Description
43447 \begin_inset space ~
43451 \begin_inset space ~
43454 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43457 \begin_layout Description
43459 \begin_inset space ~
43462 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43465 \begin_layout Description
43467 \begin_inset space ~
43471 \begin_inset space ~
43474 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43475 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43478 \begin_layout Description
43480 \begin_inset space ~
43484 \begin_inset space ~
43487 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43491 \begin_layout Description
43493 \begin_inset space ~
43497 \begin_inset space ~
43500 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43501 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43504 \begin_layout Description
43506 \begin_inset space ~
43510 \begin_inset space ~
43514 \begin_inset space ~
43517 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43518 \begin_inset space ~
43524 \begin_layout Description
43526 \begin_inset space ~
43530 \begin_inset space ~
43534 \begin_inset space ~
43537 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43538 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43541 \begin_layout Description
43543 \begin_inset space ~
43547 \begin_inset space ~
43550 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43551 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43552 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43553 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43554 \begin_inset space ~
43558 \begin_inset space ~
43564 \begin_layout Description
43566 \begin_inset space ~
43570 \begin_inset space ~
43573 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43574 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43575 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43577 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43578 \begin_inset space ~
43582 \begin_inset space ~
43588 \begin_layout Description
43590 \begin_inset space ~
43594 \begin_inset space ~
43597 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43600 \begin_layout Description
43602 \begin_inset space ~
43606 \begin_inset space ~
43609 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43612 \begin_layout Description
43614 \begin_inset space ~
43618 \begin_inset space ~
43621 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43624 \begin_layout Description
43626 \begin_inset space ~
43629 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43632 \begin_layout Description
43634 \begin_inset space ~
43637 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43640 \begin_layout Description
43642 \begin_inset space ~
43646 \begin_inset space ~
43649 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43652 \begin_layout Description
43654 \begin_inset space ~
43658 \begin_inset space ~
43664 \begin_layout Description
43666 \begin_inset space ~
43670 \begin_inset space ~
43673 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
43676 \begin_layout Description
43678 \begin_inset space ~
43682 \begin_inset space ~
43688 \begin_layout Description
43690 \begin_inset space ~
43694 \begin_inset space ~
43697 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43703 \begin_inset Index idx
43706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43713 , when using this, set the document language to
43718 \begin_layout Description
43720 \begin_inset space ~
43724 \begin_inset space ~
43727 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43732 , when using this, set the document language to
43735 \begin_inset space ~
43741 \begin_layout Description
43743 \begin_inset space ~
43747 \begin_inset space ~
43750 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43756 \begin_inset Index idx
43759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43761 packages ! japanese
43766 , when using this, set the document language to
43771 \begin_layout Description
43773 \begin_inset space ~
43777 \begin_inset space ~
43780 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43785 , when using this, set the document language to
43790 \begin_layout Description
43792 \begin_inset space ~
43796 \begin_inset space ~
43799 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43804 , when using this, set the document language to
43809 \begin_layout Description
43811 \begin_inset space ~
43814 (EUC-KR) for Korean
43817 \begin_layout Description
43819 \begin_inset space ~
43823 \begin_inset space ~
43827 \begin_inset space ~
43830 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
43833 \begin_layout Description
43835 \begin_inset space ~
43839 \begin_inset space ~
43843 \begin_inset space ~
43846 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
43847 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
43848 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
43851 \begin_layout Description
43853 \begin_inset space ~
43857 \begin_inset space ~
43863 \begin_layout Description
43865 \begin_inset space ~
43869 \begin_inset space ~
43872 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
43873 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
43876 \begin_layout Description
43878 \begin_inset space ~
43882 \begin_inset space ~
43885 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43891 \begin_inset Index idx
43894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43901 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
43904 \begin_layout Description
43906 \begin_inset space ~
43914 \begin_inset space ~
43917 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
43924 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43927 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43934 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43935 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43937 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
43940 \begin_layout Description
43942 \begin_inset space ~
43946 \begin_inset space ~
43949 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43955 \begin_inset Index idx
43958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43965 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
43968 \begin_layout Description
43970 \begin_inset space ~
43973 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43979 \begin_inset Index idx
43982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43984 packages ! inputenc
43990 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
43994 \begin_layout Description
43996 \begin_inset space ~
44000 \begin_inset space ~
44004 \begin_inset space ~
44007 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
44008 \begin_inset space ~
44014 \begin_layout Description
44016 \begin_inset space ~
44020 \begin_inset space ~
44024 \begin_inset space ~
44027 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
44028 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
44029 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
44033 \begin_layout Description
44035 \begin_inset space ~
44039 \begin_inset space ~
44043 \begin_inset space ~
44046 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
44047 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
44050 \begin_layout Section
44052 \begin_inset Index idx
44055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44062 \begin_inset Index idx
44065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44072 \begin_inset Index idx
44075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44076 Color ! Shaded boxes
44082 \begin_inset Index idx
44085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44086 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44094 \begin_layout Standard
44095 Here you can alter the font color for the
44099 (default: black), for
44102 \begin_inset space ~
44107 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44111 (default: white) and for
44114 \begin_inset space ~
44124 sets the color back to the default.
44127 \begin_layout Standard
44128 Clicking any button showing
44136 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44137 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44138 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44139 later more quickly.
44142 \begin_layout Standard
44143 Note, if you change the
44146 \begin_inset space ~
44151 font color and use the option
44154 \begin_inset space ~
44159 in the document settings under
44162 \begin_inset space ~
44167 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44168 \begin_inset space ~
44172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44174 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44181 \begin_layout Standard
44182 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44188 \begin_layout Standard
44192 \begin_inset space ~
44201 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44204 \begin_inset space ~
44207 Code after a forced page break:
44210 \begin_layout Itemize
44211 For the page color:
44212 \begin_inset Newline newline
44219 pagecolor{color name}
44222 \begin_layout Itemize
44223 For the text color:
44224 \begin_inset Newline newline
44234 \begin_layout Standard
44235 You are restricted to one of
44271 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44278 \begin_inset space ~
44284 \begin_inset Newline newline
44287 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44288 names to refer to them:
44291 \begin_layout Itemize
44297 \begin_inset Newline newline
44302 page_backgroundcolor
44305 \begin_layout Itemize
44309 \begin_inset space ~
44315 \begin_inset Newline newline
44323 \begin_layout Itemize
44327 \begin_inset space ~
44333 \begin_inset Newline newline
44341 \begin_layout Itemize
44345 \begin_inset space ~
44351 \begin_inset Newline newline
44359 \begin_layout Standard
44360 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44363 \begin_inset space ~
44371 \begin_inset space ~
44379 \begin_layout Section
44383 \begin_layout Standard
44384 Here you can adjust the
44388 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44392 as described in section
44393 \begin_inset space ~
44397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44399 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44406 \begin_layout Section
44410 \begin_layout Standard
44411 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44417 \begin_inset Index idx
44420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44422 packages ! biblatex
44432 \begin_inset Index idx
44435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44447 \begin_inset Index idx
44450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44458 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44461 Sectioned bibliography
44463 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44469 \begin_inset Index idx
44472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44474 packages ! bibtopic
44484 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
44485 Finally, you can select a document-specific
44489 for the generation of the bibliography.
44490 For a further description of these possibilities see section
44491 \begin_inset space ~
44495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44497 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44504 \begin_layout Section
44508 \begin_layout Standard
44509 Here you can define the
44513 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44515 \begin_inset space ~
44519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44521 reference "sec:Index"
44528 \begin_layout Section
44532 \begin_layout Standard
44533 The PDF properties are explained in section
44534 \begin_inset space ~
44538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44540 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44547 \begin_layout Section
44551 \begin_layout Standard
44552 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44553 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44559 \begin_inset Index idx
44562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44574 \begin_inset Index idx
44577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44589 \begin_inset Index idx
44592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44604 \begin_inset Index idx
44607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44619 \begin_inset Index idx
44622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44624 packages ! mathdots
44634 \begin_inset Index idx
44637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44639 packages ! mathtools
44649 \begin_inset Index idx
44652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44664 \begin_inset Index idx
44667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44669 packages ! stackrel
44679 \begin_inset Index idx
44682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44684 packages ! stmaryrd
44694 \begin_inset Index idx
44697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44699 packages ! undertilde
44704 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
44707 \begin_layout Description
44708 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44709 -errors in formulas,
44710 ensure that you have this enabled.
44713 \begin_layout Description
44714 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
44715 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44716 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
44720 \begin_layout Description
44721 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
44724 \begin_inset space ~
44736 \begin_layout Description
44737 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
44740 \begin_inset space ~
44752 \begin_layout Description
44753 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
44764 \begin_layout Description
44765 mathtools is used for the math commands
44801 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
44808 \begin_layout Description
44809 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
44811 Chemical Symbols and Equations
44820 \begin_layout Description
44821 stackrel is used for the math command
44838 \begin_layout Description
44839 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
44842 \begin_layout Description
44843 undertilde is used for the math command
44851 Accents for one Character
44860 \begin_layout Section
44864 \begin_layout Standard
44865 The float placement options are described in the section
44868 \begin_inset space ~
44876 \begin_inset space ~
44884 \begin_layout Section
44888 \begin_layout Standard
44889 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
44891 Program Code Listings
44896 \begin_inset space ~
44904 \begin_layout Section
44908 \begin_layout Standard
44909 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
44917 set to be used and set the
44922 The itemize environment is described in section
44923 \begin_inset space ~
44927 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44929 reference "sec:Itemize"
44936 \begin_layout Standard
44937 You can furthermore specify a
44940 \begin_inset space ~
44945 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44946 command of the desired character.
44947 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
44954 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
44956 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44960 \begin_inset space \space{}
44964 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
44974 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
44975 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
44978 \begin_layout Standard
44979 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44987 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44988 -packages in the preamble (menu
44991 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44992 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44995 \begin_inset space ~
45001 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
45005 usepackage{textcomp}
45008 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
45012 usepackage{amssymb}
45022 \begin_layout Section
45026 \begin_layout Standard
45027 Branches are described in section
45028 \begin_inset space ~
45032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45034 reference "sec:Branches"
45041 \begin_layout Section
45043 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45045 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
45052 \begin_layout Standard
45053 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45056 \begin_layout Description
45058 \begin_inset space ~
45062 \begin_inset space ~
45065 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45085 View Master Document
45086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45093 Update Master Document
45094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45101 menu or the toolbar.
45102 The default is set in
45104 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45105 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45107 \begin_inset space ~
45110 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45114 \begin_inset space ~
45118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45120 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45127 \begin_layout Description
45129 \begin_inset space ~
45133 \begin_inset space ~
45136 Output settings for the menu
45138 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45140 \begin_inset space ~
45146 For a detailed description see section
45148 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45153 \begin_inset space ~
45161 \begin_layout Description
45163 \begin_inset space ~
45167 \begin_inset space ~
45170 Options offers settings for the export format
45178 \begin_inset space ~
45183 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45184 \begin_inset space ~
45187 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45191 \begin_inset space ~
45196 settings are described in detail in section
45198 Math Output in XHTML
45203 \begin_inset space ~
45212 \begin_inset space ~
45216 \begin_inset space ~
45221 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45224 \begin_layout Description
45226 \begin_inset space ~
45231 Save transient properties
45233 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45234 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45235 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45239 \begin_layout Itemize
45240 the activation of change tracking
45243 \begin_layout Itemize
45244 the output of tracked changes
45247 \begin_layout Itemize
45248 the recording of the document directory path.
45251 \begin_layout Standard
45252 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45253 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45257 \begin_layout Section
45265 \begin_layout Standard
45266 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45268 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45270 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45272 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45276 \begin_layout Standard
45277 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45278 -syntax is given in section
45279 \begin_inset space ~
45283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45285 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45292 \begin_layout Chapter
45298 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45300 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45305 \begin_inset Index idx
45308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45317 \begin_layout Standard
45318 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45320 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45324 It has the following submenus.
45327 \begin_layout Section
45331 \begin_layout Subsection
45335 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45336 User Interface File
45337 \begin_inset Index idx
45340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45341 Customization ! of toolbars
45347 \begin_inset Index idx
45350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45351 Customization ! of menus
45359 \begin_layout Standard
45360 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45361 interface (ui) file.
45362 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45370 \begin_layout Description
45375 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45378 \begin_layout Description
45385 the menu entries in popup context menus
45388 \begin_layout Description
45393 specifies the toolbar buttons
45396 \begin_layout Standard
45397 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45398 and edit the entries.
45401 \begin_layout Standard
45402 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45414 entries must be finished with an explicit
45439 and in the case of the
45440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45452 The syntax for the entries is:
45455 \begin_layout Standard
45456 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45485 \begin_layout Standard
45487 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45490 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45491 -functions are listed in the menu
45493 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45495 \begin_inset space ~
45503 \begin_layout Standard
45504 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45510 \begin_layout Standard
45511 For example, assuming you use the menu
45513 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45516 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45520 \begin_layout Standard
45521 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45545 \begin_layout Standard
45547 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45562 to have the sixth bookmark.
45565 \begin_layout Standard
45569 \begin_inset space ~
45574 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45575 's toolbar buttons.
45576 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45577 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45580 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45588 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45592 \begin_layout Standard
45595 Enable tool tips in main work area
45597 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45601 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45605 \begin_layout Standard
45610 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45611 should display in the menu
45613 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45615 \begin_inset space ~
45623 \begin_layout Subsection
45627 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45631 \begin_layout Standard
45634 Restore window layouts and geometries
45637 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
45638 the last \SpecialChar LyX
45642 \begin_layout Standard
45645 Restore cursor positions
45647 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
45651 \begin_layout Standard
45654 Load opened files from last session
45656 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
45660 \begin_layout Standard
45663 Clear all session information
45665 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
45666 sessions (cursor positions, names
45667 of last opened documents, etc.).
45670 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45674 name "subsec:Backup documents"
45679 \begin_inset Index idx
45682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45691 \begin_layout Standard
45694 Backup original documents when saving
45696 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
45697 it was saved the last time.
45698 It is stored in the
45701 \begin_inset space ~
45707 \begin_inset space ~
45711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45713 reference "sec:Paths"
45717 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
45720 \begin_inset space ~
45726 The backup file has the file extension
45727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45741 \begin_layout Standard
45744 Backup documents, every
45746 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
45749 \begin_layout Standard
45752 Save documents compressed by default
45754 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
45755 \begin_inset space ~
45759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45761 reference "subsec:Compressed"
45766 This applies to newly created documents only.
45767 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
45770 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45771 Windows & work area
45774 \begin_layout Standard
45777 Open documents in tabs
45779 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
45783 \begin_layout Standard
45788 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
45793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45795 \begin_inset space ~
45799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45801 reference "sec:Paths"
45805 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
45812 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
45813 documents will be opened in the same running instance
45814 of \SpecialChar LyX
45816 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
45817 instance is created for each file.
45820 \begin_layout Standard
45823 Single close-tab button
45825 is checked, there will only be one close button (
45835 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
45836 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
45837 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
45841 \begin_layout Standard
45842 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45850 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
45851 before the change takes effect.
45859 \begin_layout Standard
45864 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
45866 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
45868 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
45872 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
45873 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
45874 and only want to close the view in once instance.
45877 \begin_layout Subsection
45879 \begin_inset Index idx
45882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45889 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45891 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
45898 \begin_layout Standard
45899 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
45903 \begin_layout Standard
45904 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45912 This section only deals with the fonts
45916 the \SpecialChar LyX
45918 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
45921 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45922 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45933 \begin_layout Standard
45934 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45951 (depends on the system) as its
45954 \begin_inset space ~
45970 \begin_layout Standard
45971 You can change the font size with the
45978 \begin_layout Standard
45983 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
45985 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45988 points have the size of 1
45989 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45993 \begin_inset space ~
45997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45999 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
46004 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
46005 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46009 The sizes are explained in detail in section
46010 \begin_inset space ~
46014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46016 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
46023 \begin_layout Standard
46026 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
46028 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
46029 needs to redraw the screen less often.
46030 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
46031 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
46032 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
46034 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
46035 \begin_inset space ~
46041 \begin_layout Subsection
46043 \begin_inset Index idx
46046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46047 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
46054 \begin_inset Index idx
46057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46066 \begin_layout Standard
46067 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46068 by choosing an item in the
46069 list and selecting the
46076 \begin_layout Standard
46077 By checking the option
46081 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46084 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46085 \begin_inset space ~
46089 \begin_inset space ~
46094 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46097 \begin_layout Subsection
46099 \begin_inset Index idx
46102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46111 \begin_layout Standard
46112 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46116 \begin_layout Standard
46121 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46122 This feature is described in section
46123 \begin_inset space ~
46127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46129 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46136 \begin_layout Standard
46137 Checking the option
46140 \begin_inset space ~
46144 \begin_inset space ~
46148 \begin_inset space ~
46153 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46156 \begin_layout Section
46158 \begin_inset Index idx
46161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46170 \begin_layout Subsection
46174 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46178 \begin_layout Standard
46181 Cursor follows scrollbar
46183 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46187 \begin_layout Standard
46188 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46189 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46190 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46193 \begin_layout Standard
46196 Scroll below end of document
46198 is self-explanatory.
46201 \begin_layout Standard
46202 In \SpecialChar LyX
46203 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46210 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46212 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46213 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46216 \begin_layout Standard
46219 Sort environments alphabetically
46221 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46224 \begin_layout Standard
46227 Group environments by their category
46229 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46232 \begin_layout Standard
46237 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46248 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46252 \begin_layout Standard
46253 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46258 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46259 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46263 \begin_layout Subsection
46265 \begin_inset Index idx
46268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46275 \begin_inset Index idx
46278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46279 Settings ! Shortcuts
46287 \begin_layout Standard
46292 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46294 Several binding files are available, among them:
46297 \begin_layout Description
46298 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46301 \begin_layout Description
46302 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46314 \begin_layout Description
46315 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46318 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46326 \begin_layout Standard
46327 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46332 , and binding files for special languages.
46333 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46334 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46338 \begin_inset space \space{}
46342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46350 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46351 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46352 will try to use the appropriate binding
46356 \begin_layout Standard
46357 Some binding files, like
46361 , only have a limited scope.
46362 When looking at the end of the file
46366 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46369 \begin_layout Standard
46373 \begin_inset space ~
46377 \begin_inset space ~
46382 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46383 in the selected key binding file.
46386 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46388 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46390 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46395 \begin_inset Index idx
46398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46399 Key Bindings ! Editing
46407 \begin_layout Standard
46408 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
46409 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46410 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46411 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46414 Show key-bindings containing
46417 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46418 Insert there for example as keyword
46419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46426 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46427 functions that contain
46428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46436 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46437 All \SpecialChar LyX
46438 functions are also listed in the file
46443 that you will find in the
46450 \begin_layout Standard
46451 For example, to add the shortcut
46459 , select the function and press the
46464 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46465 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46468 \begin_layout Standard
46469 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46470 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46472 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46473 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46475 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46480 \begin_layout Standard
46481 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46484 \begin_layout Standard
46485 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46487 The syntax of the entries is:
46490 \begin_layout Standard
46496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46515 \begin_layout Standard
46516 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
46517 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
46518 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46545 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
46546 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
46547 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
46548 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
46550 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
46554 , you needed to specify it as
46559 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
46562 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
46565 \begin_layout Subsection
46567 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46569 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46574 \begin_inset Index idx
46577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46584 \begin_inset Index idx
46587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46588 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46596 \begin_layout Standard
46597 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46598 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46599 provides keyboard maps.
46600 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46601 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46604 \begin_inset space ~
46608 \begin_inset space ~
46613 and select the keyboard map file named
46620 \begin_layout Standard
46629 keyboard map and, if you use the
46633 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46636 arg "keymap-primary"
46642 arg "keymap-secondary"
46645 respectively or toggle between them with
46648 arg "keymap-toggle"
46654 \begin_layout Standard
46655 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46663 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
46672 \begin_layout Standard
46673 You can also specify the mouse
46675 Wheel scrolling speed
46678 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
46682 Middle mouse button pasting
46684 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
46685 inserts the content of the clipboard.
46688 \begin_layout Standard
46696 \begin_inset space ~
46700 \begin_inset space ~
46705 you can select a key for zooming.
46706 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
46709 \begin_layout Subsection
46713 \begin_layout Standard
46714 Input completion is described in section
46715 \begin_inset space ~
46719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46721 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
46728 \begin_layout Section
46730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46737 \begin_inset Index idx
46740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46747 \begin_inset Index idx
46750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46759 \begin_layout Standard
46760 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
46761 are normally determined during
46763 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
46766 \begin_layout Description
46768 \begin_inset space ~
46771 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
46772 's working directory.
46773 It is the default when you
46784 \begin_inset space ~
46792 \begin_layout Description
46794 \begin_inset space ~
46797 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
46799 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46801 \begin_inset space ~
46805 \begin_inset space ~
46813 \begin_layout Description
46815 \begin_inset space ~
46818 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
46824 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46828 \begin_inset Newline newline
46832 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46844 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
46845 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
46853 \begin_layout Description
46855 \begin_inset space ~
46859 \begin_inset Index idx
46862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46868 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
46869 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
46870 \begin_inset space ~
46874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46876 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46884 will be used to save the backups.
46885 \begin_inset Newline newline
46888 Backup files have the ending
46889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46899 \begin_layout Description
46901 \begin_inset space ~
46904 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
46905 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
46907 \begin_inset Newline newline
46914 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46920 You can edit this file with the program
46929 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
46930 in its preferences under
46933 \begin_inset space ~
46939 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
46944 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
46946 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
46947 in your \SpecialChar LyX
46953 and \SpecialChar LyX
46954 need to be running the same time.
46955 \begin_inset Newline newline
46958 The pipe is also used for the
46962 feature, see section
46963 \begin_inset space ~
46967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46969 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46974 \begin_inset Newline newline
46977 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
46978 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
46979 \begin_inset Newline newline
46995 \begin_layout Description
46997 \begin_inset space ~
47000 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
47003 \begin_layout Description
47005 \begin_inset space ~
47008 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
47009 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
47010 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
47013 \begin_layout Description
47015 \begin_inset space ~
47018 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
47024 You only need to specify it if you are using
47028 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
47030 For \SpecialChar LyX
47035 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
47039 \begin_layout Description
47041 \begin_inset space ~
47044 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
47045 When \SpecialChar LyX
47046 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
47047 to find it on the system.
47048 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
47050 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
47052 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47059 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
47060 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
47063 \begin_layout Description
47065 \begin_inset space ~
47068 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
47069 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
47070 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
47071 code or in the document
47073 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
47075 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
47076 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
47077 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
47078 scanned for the input files.
47079 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
47080 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47082 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
47083 compilation may fail for some documents.
47086 \begin_layout Section
47090 \begin_layout Standard
47091 Here you can insert your
47100 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
47102 \begin_inset space ~
47106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47108 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47112 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47115 \begin_layout Section
47117 \begin_inset Index idx
47120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47121 Language ! Settings
47127 \begin_inset Index idx
47130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47131 Settings ! Language
47139 \begin_layout Subsection
47141 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47143 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47150 \begin_layout Description
47152 \begin_inset space ~
47156 \begin_inset space ~
47159 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47161 You can find its actual translation status here:
47162 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47164 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47172 \begin_layout Description
47174 \begin_inset space ~
47177 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47178 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47179 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47180 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47197 The most widespread language package is
47202 \begin_inset Index idx
47205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47212 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47214 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47215 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47216 come with the alternative
47222 \begin_inset Index idx
47225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47227 packages ! polyglossia
47232 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47233 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47239 The available selections are described in section
47240 \begin_inset space ~
47244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47246 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47253 \begin_layout Description
47255 \begin_inset space ~
47258 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47259 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47260 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47261 An example is the start command
47267 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47269 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47273 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47289 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47294 \begin_layout Description
47296 \begin_inset space ~
47304 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47305 command toggles the package on and off.
47308 \begin_layout Description
47310 \begin_inset space ~
47314 \begin_inset space ~
47317 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47321 \begin_layout Description
47323 \begin_inset space ~
47327 \begin_inset space ~
47330 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47334 \begin_layout Description
47336 \begin_inset space ~
47340 \begin_inset space ~
47343 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47344 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47345 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47347 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47354 \begin_layout Description
47356 \begin_inset space ~
47359 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47361 When this option is not set, the
47364 \begin_inset space ~
47369 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47371 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47374 \begin_inset space ~
47382 \begin_layout Description
47384 \begin_inset space ~
47390 \begin_inset space ~
47396 When it is not set, the
47399 \begin_inset space ~
47404 is set to the end of the document.
47407 \begin_layout Description
47409 \begin_inset space ~
47413 \begin_inset space ~
47416 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47417 language will be underlined in blue.
47420 \begin_layout Description
47422 \begin_inset space ~
47426 \begin_inset space ~
47429 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47430 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47433 \begin_layout Description
47435 \begin_inset space ~
47438 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47439 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47440 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47441 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47444 \begin_layout Subsection
47448 \begin_layout Standard
47449 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47450 \begin_inset space ~
47454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47456 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47463 \begin_layout Section
47467 \begin_layout Subsection
47469 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47471 name "subsec:General-output"
47478 \begin_layout Description
47480 \begin_inset space ~
47483 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47485 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47487 \begin_inset space ~
47493 For a detailed description see section
47495 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47500 \begin_inset space ~
47508 \begin_layout Description
47510 \begin_inset space ~
47513 Options Options for the program
47517 that is used for the export format
47522 \begin_inset space ~
47526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47528 reference "subsec:Export"
47533 Possible options are listed in the
47538 \begin_inset Newline newline
47542 \begin_inset Flex URL
47545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47547 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47557 \begin_layout Description
47559 \begin_inset space ~
47563 \begin_inset space ~
47566 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47569 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47570 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47572 \begin_inset space ~
47578 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47581 \begin_layout Description
47583 \begin_inset space ~
47587 \begin_inset Index idx
47590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47597 \begin_inset Index idx
47600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47601 Settings ! Date format
47606 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47607 \begin_inset Newline newline
47611 \begin_inset Flex URL
47614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47616 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47622 \begin_inset Newline newline
47625 For example the format
47626 \begin_inset Newline newline
47630 \begin_inset Newline newline
47633 prints the date as day/month/year.
47636 \begin_layout Description
47638 \begin_inset space ~
47642 \begin_inset space ~
47645 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47646 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47649 \begin_layout Subsection
47655 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47657 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47662 \begin_inset Index idx
47665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47666 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
47675 \begin_layout Description
47677 \begin_inset space ~
47685 \begin_inset space ~
47689 \begin_inset space ~
47692 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
47697 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
47718 are used for Cyrillic.
47719 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
47720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47732 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
47734 sets up in the background.
47735 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
47738 \begin_layout Description
47740 \begin_inset space ~
47744 \begin_inset space ~
47748 \begin_inset space ~
47752 \begin_inset space ~
47755 options They only have an effect when the program
47759 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
47762 \begin_layout Standard
47763 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
47764 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
47765 manuals of the applications.
47768 \begin_layout Description
47770 \begin_inset space ~
47773 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
47774 \begin_inset space ~
47778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47780 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
47787 \begin_layout Description
47789 \begin_inset space ~
47792 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
47793 \begin_inset space ~
47797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47799 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
47806 \begin_layout Description
47808 \begin_inset space ~
47811 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
47812 \begin_inset space ~
47816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47818 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
47825 \begin_layout Description
47831 \begin_inset space ~
47834 command Command for the program
47836 Check\SpecialChar TeX
47839 that is described in the section
47841 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
47846 Additional Features
47851 \begin_layout Standard
47852 There are additionally the following options:
47855 \begin_layout Description
47857 \begin_inset space ~
47861 \begin_inset space ~
47865 \begin_inset space ~
47869 \begin_inset space ~
47874 \begin_inset space ~
47877 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
47878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47895 to separate folders.
47896 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
47898 \begin_inset Index idx
47901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47908 \begin_inset Index idx
47911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47920 \begin_layout Description
47922 \begin_inset space ~
47926 \begin_inset space ~
47930 \begin_inset space ~
47934 \begin_inset space ~
47938 \begin_inset space ~
47942 \begin_inset space ~
47945 changes Removes all manually set
47951 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47952 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47954 \begin_inset space ~
47959 dialog when changing the document class.
47962 \begin_layout Section
47964 \begin_inset space ~
47968 \begin_inset Index idx
47971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47980 \begin_layout Subsection
47982 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47984 name "subsec:Converters"
47989 \begin_inset Index idx
47992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48001 \begin_layout Standard
48002 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
48003 from one format to another.
48004 You can modify converters or create new ones.
48005 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
48012 \begin_inset space ~
48017 field and press the
48022 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
48026 \begin_inset space ~
48031 drop-down list, modify the
48035 field and press the
48042 \begin_layout Standard
48045 Converter File Cache
48051 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
48053 Maximum Age (in days
48056 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
48057 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
48060 \begin_layout Standard
48061 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
48062 definition, is described in the section
48073 \begin_layout Subsection
48075 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48077 name "sec:File-Formats"
48082 \begin_inset Index idx
48085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48092 \begin_inset Index idx
48095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48104 \begin_layout Standard
48105 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48115 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48118 \begin_layout Standard
48119 You can also define the
48121 Default output format
48123 that is used when you use
48125 View, Update, View Master Document
48129 Update Master Document
48135 menu or the toolbar.
48138 \begin_layout Standard
48139 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48150 \begin_layout Standard
48151 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48153 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48154 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48155 This is done by specifying a
48160 More about this is described in the section
48171 \begin_layout Chapter
48172 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48174 \begin_inset Index idx
48177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48184 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48186 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48193 \begin_layout Standard
48195 \begin_inset space ~
48199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48201 reference "tab:Units"
48205 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48206 and used in this documentation.
48209 \begin_layout Standard
48210 \begin_inset Float table
48216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48217 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48220 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48235 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48243 \begin_inset Tabular
48244 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
48245 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48246 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48247 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
48248 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48294 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48335 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48397 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48401 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48405 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48562 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48566 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48599 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48603 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48636 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48640 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48672 scaled point (65536
48673 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48677 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48740 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
48745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48864 % of original image width
48869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48953 \begin_layout Chapter
48955 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48957 name "chap:Credits"
48964 \begin_layout Standard
48965 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
48966 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
48969 \begin_layout Itemize
48972 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
48975 \begin_layout Itemize
48981 \begin_layout Itemize
48987 \begin_layout Itemize
48993 \begin_layout Itemize
48999 \begin_layout Itemize
49005 \begin_layout Itemize
49011 \begin_layout Itemize
49017 \begin_layout Itemize
49020 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
49023 \begin_layout Itemize
49029 \begin_layout Itemize
49035 \begin_layout Itemize
49041 \begin_layout Itemize
49047 \begin_layout Itemize
49053 \begin_layout Itemize
49059 \begin_layout Itemize
49065 \begin_layout Itemize
49071 \begin_layout Itemize
49072 The \SpecialChar LyX
49074 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49084 \begin_layout Standard
49085 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49088 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
49095 \begin_layout Bibliography
49096 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49097 LatexCommand bibitem
49104 The \SpecialChar LyX
49106 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49109 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
49115 \begin_inset Newline newline
49119 \begin_inset Flex URL
49122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49124 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
49132 \begin_layout Bibliography
49133 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49134 LatexCommand bibitem
49135 key "latexcompanion"
49140 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49142 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49143 Companion Second Edition.
49146 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49149 \begin_layout Bibliography
49150 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49151 LatexCommand bibitem
49157 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49160 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49164 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49167 \begin_layout Bibliography
49168 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49169 LatexCommand bibitem
49178 : A Document Preparation System.
49181 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49184 \begin_layout Bibliography
49185 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49186 LatexCommand bibitem
49196 The \SpecialChar TeX
49200 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49203 \begin_layout Bibliography
49204 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49205 LatexCommand bibitem
49211 The \SpecialChar TeX
49213 \begin_inset Newline newline
49217 \begin_inset Flex URL
49220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49222 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
49230 \begin_layout Bibliography
49231 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49232 LatexCommand bibitem
49238 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49240 \begin_inset Newline newline
49244 \begin_inset Flex URL
49247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49249 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49257 \begin_layout Bibliography
49258 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49259 LatexCommand bibitem
49266 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49268 name "Documentation"
49269 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49276 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49280 \begin_inset Newline newline
49284 \begin_inset Flex URL
49287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49289 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49297 \begin_layout Bibliography
49298 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49299 LatexCommand bibitem
49306 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49308 name "Documentation"
49309 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49314 how to use the program
49316 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49320 \begin_inset Newline newline
49324 \begin_inset Flex URL
49327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49329 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49337 \begin_layout Bibliography
49338 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49339 LatexCommand bibitem
49346 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49348 name "Documentation"
49349 target "http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49354 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49360 \begin_inset Index idx
49363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49365 packages ! biblatex
49371 \begin_inset Newline newline
49375 \begin_inset Flex URL
49378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49380 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49388 \begin_layout Bibliography
49389 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49390 LatexCommand bibitem
49397 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49399 name "Documentation"
49400 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
49405 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49411 \begin_inset Index idx
49414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49422 \begin_inset Newline newline
49426 \begin_inset Flex URL
49429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49431 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
49439 \begin_layout Bibliography
49440 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49441 LatexCommand bibitem
49448 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49450 name "Documentation"
49451 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49461 \begin_inset Newline newline
49465 \begin_inset Flex URL
49468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49470 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49478 \begin_layout Bibliography
49479 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49480 LatexCommand bibitem
49481 key "makeindex-man"
49487 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49490 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49500 \begin_inset Newline newline
49504 \begin_inset Flex URL
49507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49509 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49517 \begin_layout Bibliography
49518 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49519 LatexCommand bibitem
49526 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49528 name "Documentation"
49529 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49539 \begin_inset Newline newline
49543 \begin_inset Flex URL
49546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49548 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49556 \begin_layout Bibliography
49557 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49558 LatexCommand bibitem
49565 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49567 name "Documentation"
49568 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49573 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49575 \begin_inset Newline newline
49579 \begin_inset Flex URL
49582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49584 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49592 \begin_layout Bibliography
49593 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49594 LatexCommand bibitem
49601 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49603 name "Documentation"
49604 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49609 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49615 \begin_inset Index idx
49618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49626 \begin_inset Newline newline
49630 \begin_inset Flex URL
49633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49635 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49643 \begin_layout Bibliography
49644 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49645 LatexCommand bibitem
49652 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49654 name "Documentation"
49655 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49660 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49666 \begin_inset Index idx
49669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49671 packages ! enumitem
49677 \begin_inset Newline newline
49681 \begin_inset Flex URL
49684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49686 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49694 \begin_layout Bibliography
49695 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49696 LatexCommand bibitem
49703 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49705 name "Documentation"
49706 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49711 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49717 \begin_inset Index idx
49720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49722 packages ! fancyhdr
49728 \begin_inset Newline newline
49732 \begin_inset Flex URL
49735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49737 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49745 \begin_layout Bibliography
49746 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49747 LatexCommand bibitem
49754 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49756 name "Documentation"
49757 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
49762 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49768 \begin_inset Index idx
49771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49773 packages ! hyperref
49779 \begin_inset Newline newline
49783 \begin_inset Flex URL
49786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49788 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
49796 \begin_layout Bibliography
49797 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49798 LatexCommand bibitem
49805 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49807 name "Documentation"
49808 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
49813 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49819 \begin_inset Index idx
49822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49824 packages ! microtpye
49830 \begin_inset Newline newline
49834 \begin_inset Flex URL
49837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49839 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
49847 \begin_layout Bibliography
49848 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49849 LatexCommand bibitem
49856 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49858 name "Documentation"
49859 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
49864 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49870 \begin_inset Index idx
49873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49881 \begin_inset Newline newline
49885 \begin_inset Flex URL
49888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49890 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
49898 \begin_layout Bibliography
49899 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49900 LatexCommand bibitem
49907 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49909 name "Documentation"
49910 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
49915 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49921 \begin_inset Index idx
49924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49926 packages ! prettyref
49932 \begin_inset Newline newline
49936 \begin_inset Flex URL
49939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49941 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
49949 \begin_layout Bibliography
49950 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49951 LatexCommand bibitem
49958 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49960 name "Documentation"
49961 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
49966 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49972 \begin_inset Index idx
49975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49977 packages ! refstyle
49983 \begin_inset Newline newline
49987 \begin_inset Flex URL
49990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49992 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
50000 \begin_layout Bibliography
50001 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50002 LatexCommand bibitem
50009 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50012 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
50017 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50019 \begin_inset Newline newline
50023 \begin_inset Flex URL
50026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50028 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
50036 \begin_layout Bibliography
50037 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50038 LatexCommand bibitem
50045 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50048 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
50053 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50055 \begin_inset Newline newline
50059 \begin_inset Flex URL
50062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50064 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
50072 \begin_layout Bibliography
50073 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50074 LatexCommand bibitem
50081 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50084 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
50089 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50090 for Cyrillic languages:
50091 \begin_inset Newline newline
50095 \begin_inset Flex URL
50098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50100 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
50108 \begin_layout Bibliography
50109 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50110 LatexCommand bibitem
50117 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50120 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
50125 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50127 \begin_inset Newline newline
50131 \begin_inset Flex URL
50134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50136 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
50144 \begin_layout Bibliography
50145 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50146 LatexCommand bibitem
50153 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50156 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
50161 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50163 \begin_inset Newline newline
50167 \begin_inset Flex URL
50170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50172 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
50180 \begin_layout Bibliography
50181 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50182 LatexCommand bibitem
50189 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50192 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50197 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50199 \begin_inset Newline newline
50203 \begin_inset Flex URL
50206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50208 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50216 \begin_layout Standard
50217 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50251 \begin_inset Note Note
50254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50261 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50262 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50263 bibliography is the second one:
50271 \begin_layout Standard
50272 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50273 LatexCommand bibtex
50274 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50275 options "biblio/alphadin"
50282 \begin_layout Standard
50283 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50287 \begin_layout Standard
50288 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50289 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50295 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50296 LatexCommand printindex